555847

Brother PeDesign8 Handleiding

3
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/269
Pagina verder
Instruction Manual
IMPORTANT INFORMATION: REGULATIONS
Federal Communications Commissions (FCC) Declaration of Conformity
(For USA Only)
Responsible Party: Brother International Corporation
100 Somerset Corporate Boulevard
Bridgewater, NJ 08807-0911 USA
declares that the product
Product Name: Brother USB Writer
Model Number: PE-Design
complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with
the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
– Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer or local sales
distributor could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Canadian Department of Communications Compliance Statement
(For Canada Only)
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Radio Interference
(Other than USA and Canada)
This machine complies with EN55022 (CISPR Publication 22) /Class B.
1
Congratulations on choosing our product!
Thank you very much for purchasing our product. To obtain the best performance from this unit and
to ensure safe and correct operation, please read this Instruction Manual carefully, and then keep
it in a safe place together with your warranty.
Please read before using this product
For designing beautiful embroidery patterns
• This system allows you to create a wide variety of embroidery patterns and supports a wider
range of sewing attribute settings (thread density, sewing pitch, etc.). However, the final result
will depend on your particular sewing machine model. We recommend that you make a trial
sewing sample with your sewing data before sewing on the final material.
For safe operation
• Avoid dropping a needle, a piece of wire or other metallic objects into the unit or into the card
slot.
• Do not store anything on the unit.
For a longer service life
• When storing the unit, avoid direct sunlight and high humidity locations. Do not store the unit
close to a heater, iron or other hot objects.
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the unit or cards.
• Do not drop or hit the unit.
For repairs or adjustments
• In the event that a malfunction occurs or adjustment is required, please consult your nearest
service center.
Notice
Neither this Instruction Manual nor the Installation Guide explains how to use your computer under
Windows
®
. Please refer to the Windows
®
manuals.
Copyright acknowledgment
Windows
®
is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Other product names mentioned in
the Instruction Manual and Installation Guide may be trademarks of registered trademarks of their
respective companies and are hereby acknowledged.
Important
Using this unit for unauthorized copying of material from embroidery cards, newspapers and
magazines for commercial purpose is an infringement of copyrights which is punishable by law.
Caution
The software included with this product is protected by copyright laws. This software can be used
or copied only in accordance with the copyright laws.
For additional product information and updates, visit our web site at:
http://www.brother.com/ or http://solutions.brother.com/
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
This product is intended for household use.
2
Turn Any Design
Into Original Embroidery
With PE-DESIGN
■ Layout ready-made designs
(☞p. 15)
■ Large-sized patterns
(
☞
p. 176 in the Instruction Manual (PDF format))
This software provides digitizing and
editing capabilities, allowing you the
creative freedom to design original
embroidery. Easily turn illustrations,
photos and lettering into custom
embroidery designs.
3
■ Photo Stitch function (☞p. 24, p. 127)
Embroidery can easily be created from photos taken with a digital camera.
■ Combining with background
images
(☞p. 42)
■ Creating custom logos
(☞p. 20, p. 70, p. 77, p. 80, p. 90 and p. 126)
Photo Stitch 1
(Sepia)
Photo Stitch 1 (Color)
Photo Stitch 1
(Mono)
Photo Stitch 2
(Color)
Photo Stitch 2
(Mono)
4
What You Can Do
With PE-DESIGN
Make Vivid Embroidery From Any Illustration or Photo
With Layout & Editing, images and photos can be automatically converted into embroidery patterns that can
be sewn with the desired stitches.
■ Auto Punch function
(☞p. 20, p. 126)
Illustration and images can easily be converted into
embroidery. In addition, the color and sew type can
be changed as desired.
■ Drawing Shapes to Create an
Embroidery Design
(☞p. 29, p. 70)
■ Cross Stitch function
(☞p. 27, p. 134)
Illustration and images can easily be converted into
cross-stitch embroidery. In addition, the size of the
cross-stitches can be changed as desired.
■ Combining Embroidery
Patterns
(☞p. 38, p. 47, p. 52)
5
Increased Variety With the Many Stitches and Colors
This software includes 10 stitches for region sewing and 5 stitches for line sewing. By changing the stitches
and colors, the same design can be given a different appearance. Try combining various settings.
c
For more details, refer to “Setting the thread color and sew type” on page 94.
Increased Variety of Fonts
Embroidery can be created using not only the built-in fonts, but also the TrueType fonts on your computer.
■ Monograms
(☞p. 90, p. 171 in the Instruction Manual
(PDF format))
Create monograms by simply selecting a font,
typing in the text, then selecting a decorative
pattern. A wide variety of decorative patterns are
available.
■ Easy editing
(☞p. 35, p. 80)
Change the text arrangement to edit the text as you
wish.
6
Sew Types
The sewing attributes for each sew type are first set to their default settings; however, by changing the settings
of the sewing attributes, you can create custom stitching.
c
For more details, refer to “Line sewing attributes” on page 98 and “Region sewing attributes” on
page 101.
Line sew types
Zigzag Stitch Running Stitch/Triple Stitch
Motif Stitch E/V Stitch
Region sew types
Satin Stitch Fill Stitch
Programmable Fill Stitch Motif Stitch
7
Cross Stitch Concentric Circle Stitch
Radial Stitch Spiral Stitch
Piping Stitch Piping Stitch (motif setting)
Stippling Stitch Stippling Stitch (motif setting)
c
For more details, refer to “Programmable fill stitch” on page 103, “Piping stitch” on page 105, “Motif
stitch” on page 106, and “Stippling stitch” on page 108.
b Memo:
The stitching for the programmable fill stitch and the motif stitch depends on the selected stitch pattern.
8
Basic Operation Map
This package consists of five applications.
Create Embroidery Patterns Using All Four Applications
The main application (Layout & Editing) is supported by Design Center, Font Creator, Programmable Stitch
Creator and Design Database.
Data Management
Layout & Editing (
☞
p. 47)
Further Customization
Create embroidery patterns
Font Creator
(
☞
p. 217 in the Instruc-
tion Manual (PDF format)
)
Create custom font patterns
Custom fonts can be created
to be used in text. If symbols
and double-byte characters
are also registered, the font
can be used at any time.
• Automatically convert images to
embroidery designs
• Custom lettering
• Custom designs
• Digitize
Design
Database
(
☞
p. 187 in the Instruction
Manual (PDF format))
Manage design files
• Search for files
• Open files
• Organize files
• Convert files
• Write to cards
Design Center
(
☞
p. 145)
Manually create embroidery
patterns from image
With Design Center, extract
outlines from an image, edit
the shapes of lines and
regions, and then specify
sewing attributes and colors for
each part of the pattern.
Edit/combine embroidery patterns
Programmable
Stitch Creator
(
☞
p. 199 in the Instruction
Manual (PDF format)
)
Create custom stitch patterns
Create and edit fill/stamp stitch
patterns and motif stitch
patterns.
• Combine designs
• Adjust the position, size and shape
• Specify sewing attributes
• Apply stamp patterns
Write to original cards/Save to USB media
Embroider with the machine
9
New Features of Version 8
■ Stitch Generation Features
● A motif pattern can be applied to the stippling stitch.
● The underlay stitching function has been improved.
- New underlay stitching patterns have been added to the settings available for region sewing of text
and manual punching patterns.
- The density for underlay stitching of regions can be set to Dense, Medium or Light.
■ Editing Functions and User Interface
Layout & Editing
● The Remove Overlaps and Merge commands have been added for editing shapes.
- Remove Overlaps: The overlapping regions of the shapes are removed.
- Merge: The overlapping regions of the shapes are merged.
● Designs can be created that combine embroidery with an image used in the background.
Print the image on the fabric by using an iron-on transfer sheet or printable fabric, and then embroider
on this fabric. The positioning sheet allows you to easily align the embroidering position.
● Rulers have been added at the top and left side of the Design Page. Measurement units when checking
sizes and positions can be switched between millimeters and inches.
● Multiple files can be opened. Data can be copied and pasted between files.
● The Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box, Thread Color dialog box, and Text Attribute Setting dialog
box are in a combined dialog box, which is easier to use.
● The functions in the Import dialog box for importing embroidery designs have been improved.
● The functions in the Sewing Order/Lock dialog box have been improved.
- Embroidery patterns can be locked (no changes, such as moving, enlarging/reducing or editing, can
be performed).
- The sewing attribute of the objects in each color can be changed.
● The functions in the Image to Stitch Wizard have been improved.
- Sepia modes have been added to the Photo Stitch and Cross Stitch functions.
- A feature has been added to convert regions to lines when automatically converting to an embroidery
pattern with the Auto Punch function.
- Single cross-stitches and backstitches can be edited when automatically converting an image to an
embroidery pattern with the Cross Stitch function.
● The image can be rotated in 90° increments.
● Tools for drawing lines freehand have been added.
● Arranged text on an arc can be selected from transform text pattern.
● Stitch data can be divided by color.
10
Design Center
● An eraser tool has been added to the Tool Box in the Line Image Stage.
● The maximum setting for Thinning Process when converting a line image to a figure handle image has
been increased. This allows thicker figure handle lines to be created.
Font Creator
● A TrueType font character can be opened as a template. In addition, a custom font can be created
automatically from a TrueType font.
● Characters other than letters of the alphabet, numbers and symbols can be registered.
● If a template image was open when custom font data is saved in PEF file, the template image will be
saved with the data.
■ General
● New sample embroidery files have been added to the Design Library.
● The estimated sewing time has been added to the design properties.
● Embroidery hoop sizes 200 × 200 mm(7.3/4 × 7.3/4 inches) and 200 × 300 mm(7.3/4 × 11.3/4 inches)
have been added to the Design Page Property dialog box.
● File formats have been added to those available for images that can be opened as templates or original
images.
- GIF(.gif) format is supported.
- LZW-compressed .tif is also supported.
11
Table of Contents
Instruction Manual (Basic)
New Features of Version 8................................9
Table of Contents...................................... 11
How To Use Manuals ................................ 13
Support/Service......................................... 14
Online Registration..........................................14
Checking for the Latest Version of
the Program ....................................................14
Tutorial ....................................................... 15
1. Importing Embroidery Patterns ...................15
2. Automatically Converting an Image to an
Embroidery Design......................................19
3. Drawing Shapes to Create an Embroidery
Design .........................................................29
4. Entering Text...............................................35
5. Combining Embroidery Patterns .................38
6. Print and Stitch............................................42
Arranging Embroidery Designs
(Layout & Editing) ..................................... 47
Layout & Editing Window ................................47
Opening/Importing Embroidery Designs .........47
Checking Embroidery Patterns .......................51
Editing Embroidery Designs............................52
Reshaping Embroidery Patterns .....................56
Editing a Stitch Pattern....................................62
Specifying the Design Page Size and Color ...68
Changing Application Settings ........................69
Drawing Shapes..............................................70
Manually Creating Professional-Level
Embroidery Patterns (Manual Punching) ........ 77
Adding Text .....................................................80
Entering Monograms.......................................90
Applying Sewing Attributes to Lines and
Regions ...........................................................93
Editing Regions .............................................114
Checking and Editing the Sewing
Order/Lock ....................................................117
Importing Image Data....................................120
Changing the Image Settings........................123
Automatically Converting an Image to an
Embroidery Pattern
(Image to Stitch Wizard)................................125
Saving and Printing .......................................138
Basic Design Center Operations............ 145
Creating an Embroidery Design
From an Image ..............................................145
Manually Creating Embroidery Patterns
From Images (Design Center) ................ 153
Design Center Window..................................153
Original Image Stage.....................................154
Line Image Stage ..........................................156
Figure Handle Stage......................................158
Sew Setting Stage.........................................163
About the Instruction Manual
(PDF Format)............................................ 170
12
Table of Contents
Instruction Manual (Advanced)
Tutorial (Advanced)................................. 171
Entering Monograms .....................................171
Creating Appliqués ........................................174
Creating Split Embroidery Designs................176
Creating Design for Multi-Position Hoops......182
Managing Embroidery Design Files
(Design Database) ................................... 187
Design Database Window .............................187
Starting Up Design Database ........................187
Checking Embroidery Designs ......................188
Opening Embroidery Designs........................189
Organizing Embroidery Designs....................190
Searching for an Embroidery Design.............192
Converting Embroidery Design Files to
Different Formats...........................................193
Writing Embroidery Design Files to
an Original Card ............................................194
Outputting a Catalog of Embroidery
Designs..........................................................196
Basic Programmable Stitch Creator
Operations ............................................... 199
Programmable Stitch Creator Window ..........199
Creating Fill/Stamp Stitch Pattern .................199
Creating Motif Stitch Pattern..........................203
Creating Custom Stitch Patterns
(Programmable Stitch Creator) .............. 205
Opening a Pattern File...................................206
Creating a New Pattern .................................207
Viewing the Pattern While Creating It............208
Creating a Pattern in Fill/Stamp Mode...........208
Editing a Pattern in Fill/Stamp Mode .............209
Creating Embossing/Engraving Effects
in Fill/Stamp Mode.........................................211
Creating a Pattern in Motif Mode...................212
Editing a Pattern in Motif Mode .....................213
Saving Patterns .............................................214
Changing the Settings ...................................215
Basic Font Creator Operations .............. 217
Font Creator Window.....................................217
Manually Creating Custom Font ....................219
Creating Custom Fonts (Font Creator)..225
Opening a File .............................................. 225
Selecting a Character and Preparing the
Template....................................................... 226
Creating a Font Character Pattern................ 229
Editing Font Character Patterns ................... 230
Editing the Points of a Font Character
Pattern .......................................................... 231
Checking the Created Font Patterns ............ 232
Saving Font Character Patterns ................... 234
Changing the Settings .................................. 235
Tips and Techniques ...............................237
Enlarging/Reducing Stitch Patterns .............. 237
Sewing Direction........................................... 237
Sewing Order................................................ 237
Sewing Wide Areas ...................................... 238
Jump Stitch and Jump Stitch Trimming ........ 238
Fonts Suitable for Embroidering ................... 239
Creating Outlined Characters
(Using Text Converted to Outline Object)..... 240
Converting Characters (Japanese, Chinese,
Korean, etc) to Embroidery Patterns ............ 241
Menus/Tools.............................................243
Layout & Editing............................................ 243
Design Center............................................... 249
Design Database .......................................... 254
Programmable Stitch Creator ....................... 256
Font Creator.................................................. 259
Troubleshooting ......................................263
Index .........................................................265
13
How To Use Manuals
The following manuals are included with this software.
Installation Guide
This guide contains descriptions about the preparations necessary to begin using the software. Follow the
instructions provided in this guide to complete the preparation and installation of the software.
Instruction Manual (Basic/this manual)
This manual contains descriptions of Layout & Editing and Design Center.
In order to understand how to use these applications, basic operations are first introduced through examples.
Follow these procedures to gain an understanding of the general operations of these applications.
Precautions, additional information, and details on useful functions and the various settings are described
later. Customer service information is also provided in this manual.
Instruction Manual (Basic and Advanced/PDF format)
This manual is provided in a PDF format on the enclosed CD-ROM. The following information is provided in
addition to the Instruction Manual described above.
Details on Design Database, Programmable Stitch Creator and Font Creator are provided. Refer to this
manual for information on these applications. Basic operations for each of these applications are described
through examples. Then, precautions, additional information, and details on useful functions and the various
settings are provided.
For a better understanding of the PE-DESIGN operations, an advanced tutorial, tips and techniques, and lists
of menus/tools for each application are provided. In addition, this manual contains a troubleshooting section.
Refer to this section if you have any problems while using this software.
■ Opening the Instruction Manual (PDF format)
Click All Programs, then PE-DESIGN 8, then Instruction Manual.
Otherwise, click Help, then Instruction Manual in the menu of any application.
■ Printing the Instruction Manual (PDF format)
For details on printing from Adobe
®
Reader
®
, refer to the Help for Adobe
®
Reader
®
.
b Memo:
• Adobe
®
Reader
®
is required for viewing and printing the PDF version of the Instruction Manual.
• If Adobe
®
Reader
®
is not on your computer, it must be installed. It can be downloaded from the Adobe
Systems Incorporated Web site (http://www.adobe.com/).
14
Support/Service
Contact Technical Support if you have a problem. Please check the company web site (http://
www.brother.com/) to find the technical Support in your area. To view the FAQ and information for software
updates, visit the Brother Solutions Center at (http://solutions.brother.com/).
Online Registration
If you wish to be contacted about upgrades and provided with important information such as future product
developments and improvements, you can register your product online by following a simple registration
procedure.
Click Online Registration on the Help menu of Layout & Editing to start up the installed Web browser and
open the online registration page on our Web site.
The online registration page on the Web site appears when the following address is entered in the Address
bar of the Web browser.
http://www.brother.com/registration/
Checking for the Latest Version of the
Program
Click Help in Layout & Editing, then Check for updates.
The software is checked to determine whether or not it is the latest version.
If the message shown below appears, the latest version of the software is being used.
If the message shown below appears, the latest version of the software is not being used. Click Yes, and then
download the latest version of the software from the Web site.
a Note:
• On the above website, first select your country and next choose product.
• Have the information ready before contacting Technical Support.
• Make sure your computer's operating system is current with all updates.
• Have the make and model of your computer and Windows
®
Operating System. (Refer to the
Installation Guide for system requirements.)
• Information on error messages that appear. This information will help expedite your questions
more quickly.
b Memo:
Online registration may not be available in some areas.
b Memo:
If the
Always check for most recent version
at startup
check box is selected, the software
is checked at startup to determine whether or
not it is the latest version.
15
Tutorial
Tutorial
This section describes the operations of Layout & Editing through the procedures for making embroidery
patterns. First, follow the procedures to create the embroidery patterns and learn the basic operations.
1 Importing Embroidery Patterns (☞ p. 15)
Start up Layout & Editing, and import an embroidery pattern. Then, transfer the created embroidery pattern
to an original card.
2 Automatically Converting an Image to an Embroidery Design (☞ p. 19)
Create an embroidery pattern with the Image to Stitch Wizard.
3 Drawing Shapes to Create an Embroidery Design (☞ p. 29)
Use the Shape tools to draw a design, and then specify the sewing attributes.
4 Entering Text (☞ p. 35)
Create a text pattern, and then arrange it on a shape.
5 Combining Embroidery Patterns (☞ p. 38)
Create an original design by combining various embroidery patterns.
6 Print and Stitch (☞ p. 42)
Create an original design by combining a printed image and an embroidery pattern.
1. Importing Embroidery Patterns
Sample embroidery patterns are provided with this software. These embroidery patterns can be imported into
the Layout & Editing, written to an original card, and used with the embroidery machine.
Here, we will start up Layout & Editing, import an embroidery pattern, then write the pattern to a card.
Step 1 Starting up Layout & Editing
Step 2 Importing embroidery patterns
Step 3 Transferring the design to an original card
16
Tutorial
Step 1
Starting up Layout & Editing
Click , and then select All Programs,
then PE-DESIGN 8, then PE-DESIGN 8
(Layout & Editing).
Step 2 Importing embroidery
patterns
Now, we will import the patterns for the flower,
butterfly and sun.
Click on the Toolbar.
Click .
If has not been clicked, click it.
→ The contents of Design Library are
displayed.
c
“Importing embroidery designs” on
page 48.
Click Category selector.
Move the scroll bar until Floral3 appears, and
then click it.
Drag the flower to import it into the Design
Page, as shown in the illustration.
From the Category selector, select Animals,
and then drag the butterfly into the Design
Page.
From the Category selector, select Children,
and then drag the sun into the Design Page.
1
1
2
Design Library view button
3
1. Click
2. Drag
3. Click
4
5
6
17
Tutorial
Tutorial
To adjust the positions of the embroidery
patterns, click the pattern to be moved, and
then position the pointer over the pattern.
When the shape of the pointer changes to
, drag the pattern to the desired location.
Step 3 Transferring the design to
an original card
You can sew a pattern transferred to your sewing
machine by writing it to media that can be used with
your machine.
For this example, we will transfer the design to an
original card.
Insert an original card into the USB card writer
module.
Click File, then Write to Card.
Click OK.
When the writing is finished, the following
message appears. Click OK.
a Note:
When imported stitch patterns are enlarged
or reduced, the embroidering quality may be
reduced. Therefore, we recommend not
enlarging or reducing stitch patterns.
c
“Enlarging/Reducing Stitch
Patterns” on page 237 in the
Instruction Manual (PDF
format).
b Memo:
You can also transfer designs to a floppy disk,
CompactFlash card, and USB media. You will
need to check your machine for the correct
media to use.
7
1
a Note:
When writing to an original card that already
contains data, all data on the card will be
deleted. Before using an original card, check
that the designs on the card are no longer
needed, and be sure to store all necessary
data to a hard disk or other storage media.
c
“From an embroidery card” on
page 49.
a Note:
• If the card writer module is not correctly
connected, the error message “No card
writer module is connected. Please
connect card writer module.” will appear.
• If the original card is not inserted or is
defective, the error message “No original
card is inserted. Please insert an original
card.” will appear.
b Memo:
Stitch data is compressed to fit on an original
card. Depending on the compression method,
the size of the data may change. On average,
a maximum of 200,000 stitches can fit on one
card. However, the number of stitches in a
pattern can vary depending on the type of
machine that is used.
2
3
4
18
Tutorial
c
For details on saving embroidery
patterns, refer to “Saving the embroidery
design” on page 22.
a Note:
Precautions for using the card writer
module/original cards
• The original card is inserted correctly
when you hear it snap into place.
• Never remove an original card or unplug
the USB cable while the LED indicator is
flashing.
• Correctly insert or remove the original
card according to the Instruction Manual
for the embroidery machine.
19
Tutorial
Tutorial
2. Automatically Converting an Image to
an Embroidery Design
An embroidery pattern can be created from a digital camera photo, a scanned illustration , or clip art image.
Using the Image to Stitch Wizard in Layout & Editing, an image can be converted to an embroidery pattern.
First, we must select which of the following three types of embroidery that we wish to sew.
■ Auto Punch
This creates an embroidery pattern from a clip art image or a scanned illustration.
Images with few and distinct colors are most appropriate.
■ Photo Stitch
This creates an embroidery pattern from a photo. This type of embroidery pattern has detailed and overlapping
stitching.
Photos that are bright and sharp and where the subject to be embroidered appears clearly are most
appropriate. When embroidering portraits, the size of the face in the photo should be at least 100 × 100 mm
(4 × 4 inches) for best results.
■ Cross Stitch
This creates a cross-stitch embroidery pattern from an image.
Images with few and distinct colors and where the subject to be embroidered appears clearly are most
appropriate.
■ Image file formats
Images in the following formats can be imported.
- Windows bitmap (.bmp), Exif (.tif, .jpg), ZSoftPCX (.pcx), Windows Metafile (.wmf), Portable Network
Graphics (.png), Encapsulated PostScript (.eps), Kodak PhotoCD (.pcd), FlashPix (.fpx), JPEG2000
(.j2k), GIF (.gif)
In addition, files in these formats can be imported as images for printing on iron-on paper, as an original image
in Design Center, and as templates for creating manual punching patterns, custom fonts and custom stitch
patterns.
In this section, we are going to use the Auto Punch function to automatically create an embroidery pattern from
an image. In addition, this section will describe how to view a preview and how to save the created embroidery
pattern.
b Memo:
• For details on using the Image to Stitch Wizard, refer to “Automatically Converting an Image to an
Embroidery Pattern (Image to Stitch Wizard)” on page 125.
• The sizes of embroidery patterns and images appear in the status bar. In addition, the measurement
units for the sizes can be displayed in either millimeters or inches.
c
“Measuring the distance between two points” on page 51, and “Changing the measurement
units (mm or inch)” on page 69.
• Sizes are shown in this manual in millimeters.
b Memo:
• If an EPS file doesn't contain a "Preview" image, it can not be displayed correctly. When you create a
file in EPS format, be sure to save it with preview image.
20
Tutorial
Auto Punch Function
Step 1 Importing image data into
Layout & Editing
First, we need to import the image that will be
converted into an embroidery pattern.
For this example, we will use the penguin image
(penguin.bmp) provided with this application.
Click Image, then Input, then from File.
Double-click the
Documents
(
My Documents
)\
PE-DESIGN8
\
Tutorial
\
Tutorial_2
folder to open
it.
When this application is installed, the PE-
DESIGN 8 folder is installed in the
Documents (My Documents) folder.
When an image is imported for the first time,
the contents of this folder are displayed.
Step 1 Importing image data into Layout & Editing
Step 2 Automatically converting the image to an embroidery pattern
Step 3 Displaying a preview of the embroidery
Step 4 Saving the embroidery design
1
2
21
Tutorial
Tutorial
Select the sample file penguin.bmp, and then
click Open, or double-click the file’s icon.
→ The image appears in the work area.
Drag the handle to adjust the selected image
to the desired size.
Move the pointer over the selected image, and
then drag the image to the desired position.
Step 2
Automatically converting the
image to an embroidery pattern
Next, the image will automatically be converted to
an embroidery pattern.
Click Image, then Image to Stitch Wizard.
Select Auto Punch, and then click Next.
b Memo:
Repeat steps to to choose another
picture image. If you change the way to import
data from in step , you can import picture
images from a scanner, digital camera or
clipboard, or even create images with the
portrait function and import that image.
c
“Importing Image Data” on
page 120.
b Memo:
If the handles have disappeared, right-click
the image, and then click
Modify Image
in the
menu that appeared.
3
1 3
1
4
Handles
Status bar shows the dimensions
(width and height) of the image.
5
1
2
22
Tutorial
Check the Result View of the conversion, and
then click Finish.
→ The generated embroidery pattern is
displayed.
Step 3 Displaying a preview of the
embroidery
Preview the finished embroidery.
Click Display, then Realistic Preview.
To return to the normal view, click Display,
then Realistic Preview, or press the
key.
Step 4 Saving the embroidery
design
Once the embroidery design is finished, you may
want to save it in order to retrieve it later.
Click File, then Save.
b Memo:
Selected regions can be converted to line
sewing, for example, using zigzag stitches.
c
“If Auto Punch is selected” on
page 126.
3
1
2
Esc
1
23
Tutorial
Tutorial
Select the drive and the folder, and then type
in the file name.
Click Save.
c
For details on transferring designs to
original cards, refer to “Transferring the
design to an original card” on page 17.
b Memo:
Various clip art images can be found in the
ClipArt
folder, which can be found in the
folder where PE-DESIGN was installed. (For
example, click the drive where PE-DESIGN
was installed, then
Program Files
, then
Brother
, then
PE-DESIGN 8
, then
ClipArt
.)
Try these image samples for great results.
2
3
24
Tutorial
Photo Stitch Function
By using the Photo Stitch function, embroidery patterns can be created from photos. The following two
conversion methods are available, and the color can be selected.
Photo Stitch 1:
This creates an embroidery pattern very similar to the image in one or many colors. This type of embroidery
pattern has detailed and overlapping stitching.
The embroidery pattern can be created in color (Color), sepia or grayscale (Sepia), or in one color (Mono).
Photo Stitch 2:
This creates an embroidery pattern in one or four colors. The embroidery pattern contains repeating zigzag
stitches.
The embroidery pattern can be created in four colors (Color) or in one color (Mono).
For this example, we will create an embroidery pattern using Color and Photo Stitch 1. This procedure
describes how to select the desired preview image from the six "candidates" that are created with automatic
corrections applied in order to create the embroidery pattern.
Step 1 Importing photo data into
Layout & Editing
Refer to “Importing image data into Layout &
Editing” on page 20. Select the Tutorial_2 folder,
and then select girl2-face.bmp as the image.
Step 2
Automatically converting the
image to an embroidery pattern
Next, the image will automatically be converted to
an embroidery pattern.
Click Image, then Image to Stitch Wizard.
Step 1 Importing photo data into Layout & Editing
Step 2 Automatically converting the image to an embroidery pattern
1
25
Tutorial
Tutorial
Click Photo Stitch 1, then Color, and then
click Next.
Click Auto Generate.
→ With a single-colored background, as in
this example, click Auto Generate to
automatically detect the outline of the
image.
Click Next.
Click Fit to page to change the final finishing
size.
→ This is a size where the design fills the
entire design page.
Check the preview of the area to be converted
then click Next.
b Memo:
The Sepia choice means you can create sepia
tone or grayscale tone embroidery. The
selection of mono is for black-and-white
monotone embroidery.
c
“If Photo Stitch 1 (Sepia) is
selected” on page 129, “If Photo
Stitch 1 (Mono) is selected” on
page 130.
2
3
4
b Memo:
• The shape of the mask line can be edited by
moving, adding or deleting the point of the
mask line.
• It is also possible to select the mask shape
from various template shapes already
available.
c
“If Photo Stitch 1 (Color) is
selected” on page 127.
b Memo:
• The size of the embroidery pattern appears
in the lower left corner of the dialog box. The
user can change the size freely with this
display.
• For best results, change the size of the
embroidery pattern to the sizes listed below.
• Face only: 100 × 100 mm
• Head and shoulders: 130 × 180 mm
c
“If Photo Stitch 1 (Color) is
selected” on page 127.
5
Embroidery pattern size
6
26
Tutorial
Click Select from Candidates.
→ There are six patterns with different
brightness and contrasts based on the
original image.
Select one of the candidates and click OK.
→ This preview changes to the selected
image.
Click Finish.
→ The generated embroidery pattern is
displayed.
c
For details on saving embroidery
patterns, refer to “Saving the embroidery
design” on page 22. For details on
transferring designs to original cards,
refer to “Transferring the design to an
original card” on page 17.
■ Creating Beautiful Photo
Embroidery
• Select a photograph that shows a large image.
(A photograph with an intricate image, for
example, one that contains many objects, is not
suitable.)
• Increase the contrast.
• An image with a width and height between 300
and 500 dots is suitable.
• Check the photo.
The following types of photos are not
appropriate for creating embroidery patterns.
• Photos where the subject is small, such as
in photos of gatherings
• Photos where the subject appears dark,
such as photos taken in a room or taken
with backlighting
• If the embroidery pattern is not created as
expected, change the settings in the Photo
Stitch 1 Parameters dialog box.
Brightness: Increase the brightness of the
image.
Max. Number of Colors: Increase the number
of colors that are used.
c
“Color Option” on page 131.
• If the created embroidery pattern contains colors
that you do not wish to emphasize (for example,
grays in the face), change the sewing order in
the Sewing Order/Lock dialog box so that the
undesirable color is sewn before all other colors.
c
“Editing the sewing order” on page 118.
7
8
9
27
Tutorial
Tutorial
Cross Stitch Function
Cross Stitch embroidery patterns can be created from images. For example, clip art image can be used.
Step 1 Importing image data into
Layout & Editing
Refer to “Importing image data into Layout &
Editing” on page 20. Select the Tutorial_2 folder,
and then select tulip.bmp as the image.
Step 2
Automatically converting an
image to a cross-stitch pattern
Next, the image will automatically be converted to
an embroidery pattern.
Click Image, then Image to Stitch Wizard.
Select Cross Stitch, then Color, and then
click Next.
Click Next.
In this dialog box, the cross size and the
number of colors can be specified. For this
example, we will use the default settings.
Step 1 Importing image data into Layout & Editing
Step 2 Automatically converting an image to a cross-stitch pattern
1
b Memo:
The Sepia choice means you can create sepia
tone or grayscale tone embroidery.
c
“If Cross Stitch (Sepia) is
selected” on page 136.
2
3
28
Tutorial
Click Finish.
In this dialog box, stitches can be added,
deleted or edited, and colors and the number
of times each stitch is sewn can be specified.
For this example, we will use the default
settings.
→ The generated embroidery design is
displayed.
c
For details on saving embroidery
patterns, refer to “Saving the embroidery
design” on page 22. For details on
transferring designs to original cards,
refer to “Transferring the design to an
original card” on page 17.
b Memo:
It is possible to edit stitch by stitch in one unit
of the cross stitch.
c
“If Cross Stitch (Color) is
selected” on page 134.
4
29
Tutorial
Tutorial
3. Drawing Shapes to Create an
Embroidery Design
This section will describe how to draw various shapes and combine them to create an embroidery design.
The Shape tools in Layout & Editing allow you to draw various shapes. Using these tools, we will draw the
stem, leaves, flower and flower pot.
Step 1
Drawing and moving shapes
We will follow the procedure described below to
draw shapes.
1 Select the Shape tool.
2 Specify the thread color and sew type for the
lines.
3 Specify the thread color and sew type for the
regions.
4 Drag the pointer in the Design Page to draw the
shape.
Draw the stem.
(1) Click , then .
(2) Click to display the color palette.
(3) Click LIME GREEN.
If the desired color is not displayed, move
the scroll bar until it appears.
Step 1 Drawing and moving shapes
Step 2 Duplicating, flipping and moving shapes
Step 3 Specifying hole sewing
Step 4 Applying a pattern to stitching
Step 5 Editing points and modifying shapes
4
5
1
2
6
3
Line color button
Line sew type selector
Region color button
Region sew type selector
Shape tools
Thread color palette
Selected thread color and color name
1
30
Tutorial
(4) Click in the Line sew type selector, and
then click Zigzag Stitch.
(5) Click the start point 1, and then double-
click the end point 2.
Draw the leaf on the right.
As with the stem, we will specify the color and
sew type, then draw the shape. This time,
since the shape will have a region, we will also
specify the color and sew type for the region.
(1) Click , then .
(2) Click for line sewing, and then click
LIME GREEN in the color palette.
(3) Click in the Line sew type selector, and
then select Zigzag Stitch.
(4) Click for region sewing, and then click
LIME GREEN in the color palette.
(5) Click in the Region sew type selector,
and then select Fill Stitch.
(6) While holding down the key, drag
the pointer in the Design Page, as shown
in the illustration.
(7) Place the pointer over the leaf so that the
shape of the pointer changes to , and
then drag the leaf to the desired position.
Step 2
Duplicating, flipping and
moving shapes
Now, we will duplicate the leaf on the right side, flip
it horizontally, and then move it to the left side of the
stem.
Duplicate the leaf on the right.
(1) Right-click the leaf.
(2) Click Duplicate.
1
2
2
To specify whether the color is being selected
for line sewing or region sewing, click a Color
button, or select the type of sewing here.
(1)
(2) (3) (4)
(5)
(1)
b Memo:
The color, sewing attributes and size can also
be changed after the shape is drawn.
b Memo:
To draw the shape while maintaining its
height-to-width proportion, hold down the
key while dragging the pointer.
Shift
Shift
1
31
Tutorial
Tutorial
Flip the duplicated leaf horizontally.
(1) Right-click the duplicated leaf.
(2) Click Mirror, then Vertical.
Drag the duplicated leaf to the left side of the
stem.
Align the leaves on the left and right sides.
(1) While holding down the key, right-
click on the leaf on the right side and then
click on the leaf on the left side.
(2) Click Align, then Top.
Step 3
Specifying hole sewing
Now, we will draw the flower and a circle at the
center. Then, we will apply a setting so that the
overlapping areas are not sewn twice.
Draw the flower petals.
(1) Click , then .
(2) Select RED as the line color and Zigzag
Stitch as the sew type.
(3) Select PINK as the region color and
Radial Stitch as the sew type.
(4) While holding down the key, drag
the pointer in the Design Page, as shown
in the illustration.
Draw the circle at the center.
(1) Click , then .
(2) Select YELLOW as the line color and
Zigzag Stitch as the sew type.
(3) Select YELLOW as the region color and
Concentric Circle Stitch as the sew
type.
(4) While holding down the key, drag
the pointer in the Design Page, as shown
in the illustration.
(5) Drag the circle to the center of the flower
petals.
b Memo:
Multiple embroidery patterns can be selected
in any of the following ways.
• Click the first pattern, and then, while
holding down the key, click the next
pattern.
• Drag the pointer to draw a selection frame
across the patterns to be selected.
2
3
4
Ctrl
Ctrl
1
Shift
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2) (3)
2
Shift
(1)
(1)
(5)
(4)
(2) (3)
(2) (3)
32
Tutorial
Select the patterns where hole sewing is to be
applied.
(1) Click .
(2) Click the yellow circle, then while holding
down the key, click the flower
petals.
Specify hole sewing.
(1) Click Sew, then Set hole sewing.
(2) Click OK.
Step 4
Applying a pattern to
stitching
Detailed line and region attribute settings can be
specified from the Sewing Attribute Setting dialog
box. Now, we will specify settings for region sewing
for the flowerpot.
Specify the color and sew type for the line and
region of the flowerpot.
(1) Click , then .
(2) Select CLAY BROWN as the line color
and Zigzag Stitch as the sew type.
(3) Select DEEP GOLD as the region color
and Prog. Fill Stitch as the sew type.
Specify the sewing attributes.
(1) Click .
(2) There are two display modes for the
Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box. For
this example, we will specify settings in
Beginner mode. If the dialog box is
displayed in Expert mode, click To
Beginner mode to display the dialog box
in Beginner mode.
a Note:
Hole sewing cannot be applied if one of the
patterns is not completely enclosed within
the other pattern.
c
“Preventing overlapping
stitching (hole sewing)” on
page 75.
3
Ctrl
1
(2)
(1)
4
b Memo:
Overlapped patterns can also be set so that
the overlapping region is removed or they can
be merged.
c
“Changing shapes of overlapped
patterns” on page 75.
1
(1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(2)
(3)
2
33
Tutorial
Tutorial
(3) Drag the Density slider to specify 5.0 line/
mm.
(4) Drag the red arrow in Direction area to 90
degrees.
(5) Click in the Programmable fill
section.
(6) Select net4, and then click OK.
(7) Move the slider to specify 7.6 x 7.6 mm.
The effects of the specified
settings can be previewed. This
preview can be displayed/hidden
by clicking the Show Hint/Hide
Hint button.
Click this button to return the
attribute to its default setting.
(3)
(4)
(2)
b Memo:
More detailed settings can be specified in
Expert mode.
c
“Specifying sewing attributes” on
page 96.
The selected pattern is displayed.
34
Tutorial
Step 5
Editing points and modifying
shapes
Now, we will delete one corner from the pentagon to
create a flowerpot.
Draw the flowerpot.
Drag the pointer in the Design Page, as shown
in the illustration.
Delete a point.
(1) Click , then .
(2) Click the shape for the flowerpot.
→ The points in the shape appear.
(3) Right-click the top point to be deleted, and
then click Delete.
→ The point is deleted to form a trapezoid.
This completes the pattern.
c
For details on saving embroidery
patterns, refer to “Saving the embroidery
design” on page 22. For details on
transferring designs to original cards,
refer to “Transferring the design to an
original card” on page 17.
1
2
(3)
(2)
(3)
(1)
35
Tutoria l
Tutorial
4. Entering Text
In this example, we will create an embroidery pattern for text.
From Layout & Editing, various embroidery patterns can be created for text.
Built-in fonts: This software is provided with 35 built-in fonts.
TrueType fonts: TrueType fonts installed on your computer can be used to create embroidery
patterns.
Small fonts: These small fonts have sizes between 3 and 6 mm (0.12 and 0.24 inch).
Because of their size, these fonts are useful for beautifully sewing small text.
Monograms: Design custom monograms by combining text and decorative patterns.
Custom fonts: User-defined fonts can be created by using the Font Creator.
Text arrangement: The text can be arranged along an outline or an arc.
Transforming: Text can be transformed into any of the 26 Transform styles.
c
For details, refer to “Adding Text” on page 80.
This section describes the procedures for entering text and arranging it on a circle.
Step 1
Drawing a circle
Draw the circle that the text will be arranged on.
Click , then .
Select YELLOW as the line color and Zigzag
Stitch as the line sew type.
Refer to “Drawing and moving shapes” on
page 29.
Turn off region sewing.
Click so that and the Region sew
type selector are no longer displayed.
Step 1 Drawing a circle
Step 2 Entering text
Step 3 Arranging text on a shape
1
2
3
36
Tutorial
Drag the pointer in the Design Page, as shown
in the illustration.
Step 2
Entering text
Click , then .
Click the Design Page.
From the keyboard, type in “ABCDE”.
Click OK.
→ The text appears in the Design Page.
Step 3
Arranging text on a shape
Select the text and the circle.
c
“Memo” on page 31.
Place the pointer over the ellipse or text so
that the shape of the pointer changes to ,
right-click it, and then click Fit Text to Path
Setting.
In the Fit Text to Path Attribute Setting
dialog box, select the text arrangement. For
this example, we will leave the default setting
unchanged.
b Memo:
Text can also be entered by clicking a
character under
Insert Character
, then
clicking
insert
.
4
1
2
3
The entered text appears.
b Memo:
The character font, size, color and sew type
can be changed.
c
“Selecting text attributes” on
page 81.
4
1
2
37
Tutorial
Tutorial
Click OK.
→ The text is arranged along the circle.
This completes the pattern.
c
For details on saving embroidery
patterns, refer to “Saving the embroidery
design” on page 22. For details on
transferring designs to original cards,
refer to “Transferring the design to an
original card” on page 17.
3
b Memo:
• The arranged text can be moved to the
desired location on the shape. Select only
the text that is arranged on the shape, and
then drag it along the shape (path) as
shown below.
• The text can be arranged in a variety of ways.
c
“Specifying text arrangement” on
page 87.
• The text can be arranged on an arc using a
different method.
c
“Transforming text” on page 84.
38
Tutorial
5. Combining Embroidery Patterns
In this example, we will create an original embroidery pattern by combining an embroidery pattern created from
an image 1, an embroidery pattern created from entered text 2, and an embroidery pattern included with this
software 3. At the same time, we will resize each embroidery pattern and rearrange them.
Step 1
Using the Auto Punch function to create
an embroidery pattern from an image
Now, we will open the image of the tulip and convert
it to an embroidery pattern.
Click Image, then Input, then from File.
Import the file tulip.bmp.
Select the file
tulip.bmp
by clicking the
Documents
(
My Documents
) folder, then
PE-DESIGN 8
, then
Tutorial
, then
Tutorial_5
.
c
“Importing image data into Layout &
Editing” on page 20.
While holding down the key, drag a
handle to reduce the size of the image.
Click on the Tool Box.
Select Auto Punch, and then click Next.
Step 1 Using the Auto Punch function to create an embroidery pattern from an image
Step 2 Adding text and adjusting character spacing
Step 3 Adding an oval and adjusting the text
Step 4 Importing and rotating an embroidery pattern
1
2
3
1
2
3
Shift
4
5
39
Tutorial
Tutorial
Click Finish.
→ An embroidery pattern of the tulip is
created.
Step 2 Adding text and adjusting
character spacing
Click , then . Click the bottom edge
of the tulip.
From the keyboard, type in “Tulip”, and then
click OK.
→ The text is entered.
Click , then .
Click the text, and then click the lower-left
point of “p”.
Place the pointer over “p” so that the shape of
the pointer changes to , and then drag
the character to the right to adjust the
character spacing.
In the same way, move points of other
characters to adjust the overall character
spacing.
6
1
2
3
4
5
40
Tutorial
Step 3 Adding an oval and
adjusting the text
Click , then .
Turn off line and region sewing.
c
“Drawing a circle” on page 35.
Draw an oval and adjust its position.
Drag the pointer within the work area to draw
a large circle, and then adjust its position.
Select the word Tulip. Hold the key
down and select the oval.
Place the pointer over the oval or text so that
the shape of the pointer changes to ,
right-click it, and then click Fit Text to Path
Setting.
Select the other side check box, and then
click OK.
→ The text is arranged along the inside of
the circle.
Click outside of the currently selected object
so that nothing is selected, and then select the
text and drag it along the circle.
c
“Memo” on page 37 and “Specifying text
arrangement” on page 87.
1
2
3
4
Ctrl
5
6
7
41
Tutorial
Tutorial
Step 4 Importing and rotating an
embroidery pattern
Now, we will import the embroidery pattern for the
butterfly, and then adjust its angle.
Click File, then Import.
Click .
If has not been clicked, click it.
From the Category selector, select Animals,
and then drag the butterfly into the Design
Page.
Click the butterfly to select it, and then click
on the Toolbar.
Drag a rotation handle that appeared to adjust
the angle of the pattern.
This completes the pattern.
c
For details on saving embroidery
patterns, refer to “Saving the embroidery
design” on page 22. For details on
transferring designs to original cards,
refer to “Transferring the design to an
original card” on page 17.
1
2
Design Library view button
3
4
5
42
Tutorial
6. Print and Stitch
In this example, we will create a design that combines embroidery and an image.
We will import an image into Layout & Editing, and then create an embroidery design that combines it with the
image. Next, we will print the image on an iron-on transfer sheet or printable fabric, and then use the
embroidery machine to sew the embroidery on top of printed fabric.
Step 1
Creating a design combined
with a background image
These designs can be created by importing an
image, then creating an embroidery pattern or
importing an existing embroidery pattern. For this
example, we will use the gift box image
(Bear_Background.jpg) and the embroidery pattern
of the bear (Bear.pes) provided with this software.
Start up Layout & Editing.
Specify a Design Page size of 130 x 180 mm.
c
“Specifying the Design Page Size and
Color” on page 68.
Click Image, then Input, then from File.
Import the file Bear_Background.jpg.
Select the file Bear_Background.jpg by
clicking the Documents (My Documents)
folder, then PE-DESIGN 8, then Tutorial, then
Tutorial_6.
c
“Importing Image Data” on page 120.
Click .
Step 1 Creating a design combined with a background image
Step 2 Printing the background image
Step 3 Printing the positioning sheet
Step 4 Embroidering
Print the background image on fabric.
Embroider
1
2
3
4
43
Tutorial
Tutorial
Import the file Bear.pes.
Select the file Bear.pes by clicking the
Documents (My Documents) folder, then
PE-DESIGN 8, then Tutorial, then
Tutorial_6.
c
“Importing embroidery designs” on
page 48.
Enter the text.
Select built-in font No. 30, and thread color
DEEP ROSE.
c
“Entering text/Small text” on page 80.
Transform the text to fit with the design of the
image.
(1) Click .
(2) Select the Transform check box, and
then click .
(3) Click , and then drag the rotation
handle to adjust the angle of the pattern.
(4) Drag or a handle to adjust the size of
the pattern.
c
“Transforming text” on page 84, “Rotating
patterns” on page 54.
After the design is finished, save the
embroidery data onto media so it can be
transferred to the embroidery machine.
c
For details on saving embroidery
patterns, refer to “Saving the embroidery
design” on page 22. For details on
transferring designs to original cards,
refer to “Transferring the design to an
original card” on page 17.
Step 2 Printing the background
image
Print the background image on an iron-on transfer
sheet or printable fabric.
Click File, then Print Setup.
5
6
7
(2)
(2)
(1)
(3)
(4)
8
1
44
Tutorial
Specify the print settings.
(1) Select the printer to be used.
(2) Under Paper and Orientation, select the
appropriate settings for the iron-on
transfer sheet or printable fabric to be
printed on.
(3) Select Image print mode.
(4) Select Print the image on printable
fablic or an iron-on transfer sheet.
(5) To print a flipped image on an iron-on
transfer sheet, select the Print a flipped
image check box.
Some printers will automatically print an
image flipped if an iron-on transfer sheet
is selected as the paper. If this type of
printer is being used, clear the Print a
flipped image check box.
For details, refer to the instructions for the
printer being used.
Click Change Position.
Check the image position.
If any part of the image extends out of the print
area, drag the image to adjust its position.
Click OK.
Click Print.
Specify the appropriate settings in the Print
dialog box, and then click OK.
c
“Printing” on page 143.
→ Printing begins.
2
(1)
(2) (2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
3
b Memo:
To check the print image, click
Print Preview
.
b Memo:
For details on printing on iron-on transfer
sheets or printable fabric, refer to the
instructions for the iron-on transfer sheets and
printable fabric.
4
5
6
7
45
Tutorial
Tutorial
Step 3 Printing the positioning
sheet
Print a sheet for aligning the image and the
embroidery.
Specify the print settings.
(1) Under Paper and Orientation, select the
appropriate settings for the paper to be
printed on.
(2) Select Print a sheet of paper for
aligning the printed image and the
embroidery.
Click Print.
Specify the appropriate settings in the Print
dialog box, and then click OK.
c
“Printing” on page 143.
→ Printing begins.
Step 4 Embroidering
If an iron-on transfer sheet is used, transfer
the image onto fabric.
Hoop the fabric in the embroidery frame.
Place the positioning sheet on the fabric to be
embroidered so that it is aligned with the
printed image.
• If the positioning sheet is too large, cut it to
an appropriate size so it can easily be used
for aligning the positions.
• Tape the positioning sheet to the fabric to
secure it in place.
Attach the embroidery frame to the
embroidery machine.
Be sure that the positioning sheet does not
move out of place.
b Memo:
To check the print image, click
Print Preview
.
1
(1) (1)
(2)
2
3
b Memo:
For details on transferring from iron-on
transfer sheets, refer to the instructions for the
iron-on transfer sheets.
1
2
3
4
46
Tutorial
Align the needle with the mark at the center of
the positioning sheet.
• If the embroidery machine has a built-in
camera, press the start positioning button
to detect the positioning mark and
automatically align the embroidering
position.
• With other embroidery machines, manually
align the positions.
After positioning is finished, remove the
positioning sheet from the fabric.
Start the embroidery machine to embroider
the pattern.
b Memo:
• For details on using the embroidery
machine, refer to the Operation Manual
included with the machine.
• Six patterns of completed samples for Print
and Stitch are provided in the following
folder.
Documents
(
My Documents
)\
PE-DESIGN 8\Sample
\
Layout & Editing
\
Print and Stitch
5
6
7
47
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Layout & Editing Window
1 Toolbar
Provides shortcuts for the menu commands.
2 Sewing Attributes bar
Sets the sewing attributes (color and sew type)
of lines and regions in the pattern.
3 Tool Box
Used to create, select and edit patterns.
4 Reference Window
Displays all patterns in the work area, giving you
an overview while you work on a detailed area.
c
“Viewing design in the reference window”
on page 66.
5 Design Page
The actual part of the work area that can be
saved and sewn.
6 Work area
7 Thread colors, sewing attributes and text
attributes
This dialog box combines tabs for specifying
thread colors, sewing attributes and text
attributes. Click a tab to display the parameters.
Opening/Importing Embroidery Designs
Creating a new embroidery
design
Toolbar button:
1. Click , or click File, then New.
→ A new Design Page appears.
5
3
6
4
2
1
7
b Memo:
The default value for the design page size in
this example is 100 ×100 mm (4 × 4 inches).
b Memo:
• To display this dialog box, click or ,
or select the menu command
Sew
-
Sewing
Attribute Setting
or
Text
-
Text Attribute
Setting
.
To close this dialog box, click .
• When the application is first started, this
combined dialog box is attached at the right
side of the window. This dialog box can be
moved by dragging it or double-clicking its
title bar (bar at the top of the dialog box). To
return the dialog box to its original attached
position, drag it to the right side of the
window or double-click its title bar.
b Memo:
Multiple files can be opened in Layout & Editing. In addition, data can be copied and pasted between files that
are open at the same time.
b Memo:
The size of the Design Page can be changed.
c
“Specifying the Design Page Size
and Color” on page 68.
48
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Opening a Layout & Editing
file
An embroidery design that has previously been
saved as a Layout & Editing file (.pes file) can be
opened.
Toolbar button:
1. Click , or click File, then Open.
2. Select the drive and the folder.
• If the Preview check box is selected, the
contents of the selected file will appear in
the Preview box.
3. To open a file, select it, and then click Open,
or double-click the file’s icon.
→ The contents of the selected file appear in
the Design Page.
Importing embroidery
designs
Toolbar button:
1. Click , or click File, then Import.
2. Select the category from the drop down menu
then select the view mode.
1 Design Library view mode
2 Folder view mode
3 Card view mode
b Memo:
• To view the data in the selected folder as
thumbnails in the
Browse
dialog box, click
Browse
.
To see a more detailed design, select a file,
and then click
Preview
.
• To open the displayed file, click
Open
.
a Note:
• If no files are listed, there are no .pes files
in the selected folder. Select a folder
containing a .pes file.
• If the selected file is in a format other than
the .pes format, the message
“Unexpected file format” appears in the
Preview
box.
b Memo:
A file can be opened in any of the following
ways.
• Display the embroidery design file in
Windows Explorer, and then drag the
file into the Layout & Editing window.
• Display the embroidery design file in
Windows Explorer, and then double-
click the file.
213
49
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
3. Select the file icon for the design to be
imported, and then click Import, or double-
click the file icon.
→ The embroidery design is displayed in the
Design Page.
4. Click in the upper-right corner of the
Import dialog box to close it.
■ From Design Library
1. Click to display the dialog box in
Design Library view mode.
2. From the Category selector, select a category
to display the corresponding embroidery data.
■ From a folder
1. Click to display the dialog box in
folder view mode.
2. Click .
→ The Browse for folder dialog box
appears.
3. Select a folder, and then click OK.
4. From the File Type box, select a file name
extension to display the corresponding
embroidery data.
■ From an embroidery card
1. Insert an embroidery card into the USB card
writer module.
c
Refer to “Transferring the design to an
original card” on page 17.
2. Click .
→
After the card has been read, the dialog box
appears in card view mode, and the
embroidery designs on the card are displayed.
b Memo:
• The design can be imported by dragging its
file icon from the
Import
dialog box to the
Design Page.
• Multiple files cannot be selected to be
imported at the same time.
a Note:
When importing designs from other vendors,
be sure to choose a design that will fit in the
Design Page.
Indicates the path to the currently selected folder.
b Memo:
Since .dst files do not contain thread color
information, the colors are temporarily
assigned when the design is imported into
Layout & Editing. Therefore, the colors of an
imported .dst file may not appear as expected.
You can change the thread colors using
functions in the
Sewing Order/Lock
dialog
box.
c
“Changing colors” on page 118.
a Note:
Due to copyright issues, some embroidery
cards cannot be used with this function.
50
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Importing embroidery design
from Design Center
An embroidery design in Design Center can be
imported directly into the Layout & Editing Design Page.
c
“Manually Creating Embroidery Patterns
From Images (Design Center)” on page 153.
Toolbar button:
1. Start up Design Center and open the file.
c
“Original Image Stage” on page 146
and “Opening a file” on page 155.
2. Click , or click File, then Import from
Design Center.
3. In the Magnification box, type or select the
magnification factor.
4.
Under
Orientation
, select the desired orientation.
5. Click Import to import the embroidery design.
a Note:
The maximum magnification ratio that can
be specified is the ratio that enlarges the
design to the size of the Design Page. The
minimum magnification ratio is 25%.
51
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Checking Embroidery Patterns
Zooming
You can zoom in to work on details of the
embroidery pattern or you can zoom out to work on
any part of the embroidery pattern that cannot be
viewed in the work area.
After clicking on the Tool Box,
appear. Click the button for
the desired operation.
: Click in the Design Page to display the area
enlarged.
To zoom in on a specific area, move the
pointer near the desired area, and then drag
the pointer diagonally over the desired area.
: Click in the Design Page to display the area
reduced.
: The Design Page is displayed at its actual
size.
: Select an object, and then click the button.
The Design Page is zoomed to display only
the selected objects.
: The entire Design Page is displayed to fit
within the window.
Measuring the distance
between two points
1. Click on the Tool Box.
2. Move the pointer to the beginning of the part of
the object, and then hold down the mouse
button.
→ A small circle appears, indicating the start
point of the measurement.
3. Drag the pointer to view the measurement in
the status bar.
Length
Width
Height
52
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Editing Embroidery Designs
This section describes various editing operations, such as moving, enlarging/reducing or rotating patterns. A
pattern must first be selected before it can be edited.
Selecting patterns
1. Click on the Tool Box.
2. Click the pattern.
→ Handles appear around the pattern.
3. To select an additional pattern, hold down the
key and click the other pattern.
■ Selecting all embroidery patterns
1. Click on the Tool Box.
2. Click Edit, then Select All.
Moving patterns
1. Move the pointer over a selected pattern or
group of selected patterns.
2. Drag the pattern to the desired location.
■ Moving embroidery patterns to
the center
1. Select one or more patterns.
2. Click Edit, then Center.
→ All selected patterns move to the center of
Design Page.
b Memo:
• The status bar shows the dimensions (width
and height) of the pattern.
• To deselect the pattern, select a different
pattern, click a blank area of the Design
Page, or click any other button in the Tool
Box.
b Memo:
You can also select patterns by dragging the
pointer across the pattern.
b Memo:
Press the key to select the next pattern
in the order that they were created.
Handles
Ctrl
Tab
b Memo:
• To move the pattern horizontally or
vertically, hold down the key while
dragging it.
b Memo:
• Pressing the arrow keys moves the
selected pattern 0.5 mm (about 0.02 inch) in
the direction of the arrow on the key.
Holding down the arrow key for the desired
direction continues moving the outline in
that direction.
• If
Snap to Grid
is selected from
Display :
Grid setup
, each press of an arrow key
moves the pattern one grid mark in the
direction of the arrow on the key.
c
“Changing the grid settings” on
page 69.
• The arrow keys cannot be used to move
text on a path if just the text is selected. The
path must also be selected in order to move
using the arrow keys.
c
“Specifying text arrangement” on
page 87.
Shift
53
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
■ Aligning embroidery patterns
1. Select the patterns.
2. Click Edit, then Align, then Left, Center,
Right, Top, Middle, or Bottom.
→ The selected patterns are aligned as
shown below.
Scaling patterns
■ Scaling manually
1. Select the pattern(s).
2. Drag the handle to adjust the selected
pattern(s) to the desired size.
■ Scaling numerically
1. Select the patterns.
2.
Click
Edit
, then
Numerical Setting
, then
Size
.
3. To change the width and height proportionally,
select the Maintain aspect ratio check box.
4. Select the whether the width and height will be
set as a percentage (%) or a dimension
(millimeters or inches).
5. Type or select the desired width and height.
6.
To resize the selected pattern while maintaining
the original density and fill pattern, select the
Keep density and fill pattern
check box.
7. Click OK.
b Memo:
• If the key is held down while a handle
is dragged, the pattern is enlarged or
reduced from the center of the pattern.
• As you drag the handle, the current size is
displayed on the status bar.
Bottom
RightCenterLeft
Middle
Top
Handles
Shift
a Note:
• Stamp settings remain independent from
the patterns that they are applied to. If a
pattern containing a stamp is edited, be
sure to check the stamp after editing is
finished.
c
“Applying and editing Stamps”
on page 114.
• Some patterns imported from embroidery
cards cannot be scaled.
• When scaling stitch patterns, the number
of stitches remains the same, resulting in
a loss of quality. To keep density and fill
pattern of the embroidery pattern, hold
down the key while scaling.
c
“Enlarging/Reducing Stitch
Patterns” on page 237 in the
Instruction Manual (PDF format).
b Memo:
The
Keep density and fill pattern
check box
is available only if stitch data is selected.
c
“Enlarging/Reducing Stitch
Patterns” on page 237 in the
Instruction Manual (PDF format).
Ctrl
54
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Flipping patterns
horizontally or vertically
Toolbar button: ,
1. Select the pattern(s).
2. Click Edit, then Mirror, then Horizontal, or
click .
Click Edit, then Mirror, then Vertical, or click
.
Rotating patterns
■ Rotating manually
Toolbar button:
1. Select the pattern(s).
2. Click Edit, then Rotate, or click .
3. Drag the rotation handle.
a Note:
Some patterns imported from embroidery
cards cannot be flipped.
b Memo:
To rotate the pattern in 15° increments, hold
down the key while dragging the
handle.
2. The shape of pointer changes to
3. Rotate
1. The handles are replaced by
smaller squares.
Shift
55
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
■ Rotating numerically
1. Select the pattern(s).
2. Click Edit, then Numerical Setting, then
Rotate.
3. Type or select the desired rotation angle.
4. Click OK.
Grouping/Ungrouping
embroidery patterns
■ Grouping patterns
Several individual patterns can be grouped so that
the same changes apply to all of the patterns within
the group.
1. Select several patterns.
2. Click Edit, then Group.
→ The selected patterns are grouped.
■ Ungrouping patterns
1. Select a grouped embroidery pattern.
2. Click Edit, then Ungroup.
→ The patterns are ungrouped.
■ Editing grouped patterns
individually
Even after patterns are grouped, they can be edited
individually.
1. To select a single pattern within a group, hold
down the key while clicking the pattern.
To select multiple patterns within a group, hold
down the and keys while clicking
the patterns.
2. Edit the object as desired.
b Memo:
• An angle can also be selected by dragging
in the
Rotate
dialog box.
b Memo:
If part of a pattern with hole sewing or any
other path arrangement applied is selected to
be grouped, the entire pattern is grouped.
b Memo:
A light blue frame appears around the
grouped patterns whenever the group or an
individual pattern is selected.
b Memo:
Grouping is cancelled if patterns are deleted
to leave only one.
Alt
Alt Ctrl
56
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Reshaping Embroidery Patterns
Selecting points
1. Click on the Tool Box.
→ Two buttons appear .
2. Click .
3. Click the pattern.
→ The points in the pattern appear as small
empty squares.
4. To select a single point, click an empty square.
• The selected point appears as a small
black square.
b Memo:
The pattern can be a broken line, a curve, an
arc, a fan shape, an arc & string, a manual
punching pattern, or stitch data.
b Memo:
Multiple points can be selected in any of the
following ways.
• Drag the pointer.
→
All points within the box are selected.
• Hold down the key while clicking the
points.
→
Each point that is clicked is added to
the selection.
→
To deselect a point, click the selected
point.
• Hold down the key while clicking the
points.
→
All points between those that were
clicked are selected.
• Hold down the key while pressing
the or key.
→
The next point toward the end point is
added to the selection.
→
To deselect a point, press the
or key.
• Hold down the key while pressing
the or key.
→
The next point toward the start point is
added to the selection.
→
To deselect a point, press the
or key.
In addition, the direction for selecting points
can be changed toward the start point or
toward the end point as described below.
• Hold down the key while pressing the
or key.
→
The selection direction changes to the
end point.
• Hold down the key while pressing the
or key.
→
The selection direction changes to the
start point.
• For details on selecting points in a stitch
pattern, refer to “Selecting stitch points of
stitch pattern” on page 62.
Ctrl
Shift
Shift
Shift
Ctrl
Ctrl
57
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Moving points
1. Select the point.
c
“Selecting points” on page 56.
2. Drag the point to the new location.
a Note:
You must drag a point that is selected. If you
start dragging by clicking elsewhere on the
outline of the pattern, a new point will be
inserted or the selected point(s) will be
deselected.
Selected point
Drag
b Memo:
• All of the selected points move in the same
direction.
• To move the point of a broken line, a curve,
a manual punching pattern, or stitch data
horizontally or vertically, hold down the
key while dragging it.
• Pressing the arrow keys moves the
selected point 0.5 mm (about 0.02 inch) in
the direction of the arrow on the key.
Holding down the arrow key for the desired
direction continues moving the outline in
that direction.
•If
Snap to Grid
is selected, each press of
an arrow key moves the point one grid mark
in the direction of the arrow on the key.
• The arrow keys cannot be used to move the
end points of an Arc, Arc & String, and Fan.
• Points in patterns set for hole sewing can
also be moved. However, the point cannot
be moved to cross an outline. In order to
move the point in this way, cancel hole
sewing first.
Shift
58
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Inserting points
New points can be inserted in order to change the
shape of a pattern. In the case of a new point on a
curve, you can also use the handle to reorient the
tangent to the new point.
1. Click , then .
2. Click the pattern.
3. Click the outline to add a point.
Deleting points
1. Select the point.
c
“Selecting points” on page 56.
2. Click Edit, then Delete, or press the
key to remove the point.
Transforming straight lines into
curves or curves into straight lines
1. Select the point.
c
“Selecting points” on page 56.
2. Click Edit, then Point, then click To Curve, or
click To Straight.
Click
b Memo:
To transform a curve to a straight line, click a
point on the curve, and then click
Edit
, then
Point
, then
To Straight
.
Delete
Selected point
Delete
To C u r ve To Straight
59
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Smoothing out the path at a
point
1. Select the point where the path is to be
smoothed out.
c
“Selecting points” on page 56.
2. Click Edit, then Point, then To Smooth.
→ The path at the point is smoothed out.
3. Drag the path to adjust it.
Symmetrically adjusting the
control handles of a point
1. Select the point where the control handles are
to be adjusted symmetrically.
c
“Selecting points” on page 56.
2. Click Edit, then Point, then To Symmetry.
3. Drag the path to adjust it.
→ The control handles of the point are
moved symmetrically.
Transforming to a pointed
path
1. Select the point where the path is to be
transformed to a pointed one.
c
“Selecting points” on page 56.
2. Click Edit, then Point, then To Cusp.
→ The path is transformed to a pointed one
at the selected point.
3. Drag the path to adjust it.
60
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Moving entry/exit points
and the center point
■ Moving the entry/exit points
You can reposition the entry and exit points of
objects created with the tools on the Tool Box in
order to adjust the stitching.
1. Click on the Tool Box.
→ Two buttons appear .
2. Click .
3. Click the object.
→ The entry and exit points of the object
appear.
This is the entry point for the outline
stitching. The previous pattern is
connected to this point.
This is the exit point for the outline
stitching. Stitching continues from this
point to the next pattern.
This is the entry point for the inside
region stitching. The previous pattern
is connected to this point.
This is the exit point for the inside
region stitching. Stitching continues
from this point to the next pattern.
4. Drag the arrow for the point to the desired
location on the outline.
■ Optimizing the entry/exit points
The positions of the entry and the exit points for the
objects can be adjusted automatically in order to
optimize stitching.
1. Click Sew, then Optimize Entry/Exit points.
To optimize the entry and exit points, select
this command so that a check mark appears.
To cancel optimizing, select this command so
that no check mark appears.
→ If a check mark appears beside Optimize
Entry/Exit points, the entry and exit
points for the stitching of connected
objects with the same color are optimized
(in other words, they are connected by the
shortest distance possible).
a Note:
If the entry and exit points have been
optimized (a check mark appears in front of
the
Optimize Entry/Exit points
command
on the
Sew
menu), the entry and exit points
of the patterns cannot be edited. In order to
use this tool for editing the entry and exit
points, select the menu command
Sew
–
Optimize Entry/Exit points
to cancel the
setting.
b Memo:
If the region has the concentric circle stitch or
radial stitch applied, the center point of the
stitching also appears.
c
“Moving the center point” on
page 61.
a Note:
The entry and exit points of stitch data, text,
and manual punching patterns cannot be
edited.
b Memo:
If the outline or the inside region are set to not
be sewn, the corresponding point does not
appear.
a Note:
• Only entry and exit points for patterns
created with the Circle or Arc, Rectangle
and Outline tools can be edited. Stitch
pattern or patterns created with the Text
tools or Manual Punch tools cannot be
edited.
• If the menu command
Sew
–
Optimize
Entry/Exit points
is selected to optimize
the entry and exit points, all manual
adjustments of the entry and exit points
will be lost, and the positions of the points
will be automatically optimized.
61
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
→ If the check mark does not appear beside
Optimize Entry/Exit points, the entry
and exit points are not optimized. If the
optimizing of the entry and exit points is
cancelled, the entry point and exit point
positions are retained. In addition, the
positions of the entry and the exit points
can be manually changed with the Entry/
Exit/Center point tool.
■ Moving the center point
The center point for regions set to the concentric
circle or radial stitch can be repositioned for a more
decorative effect.
1. Click , then .
2. Click the region set to the concentric circle or
radial stitch.
→ The entry and exit points and the center
point of the object appear.
3. Drag the center point to the desired location.
a Note:
• Only entry and exit points for patterns
created with the Circle or Arc, Rectangle
and Outline tools can be optimized.
• If the menu command
Sew
–
Optimize
Entry/Exit points
is selected to optimize
the entry and exit points, the entry and exit
points cannot be moved with the Entry/
Exit point tool.
Optimize Entry/Exit points not selected
Optimize Entry/Exit points selected
Center point
62
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Editing a Stitch Pattern
In stitch patterns, stitches appears as solid lines ( ), and jump stitches appear as dotted lines ( ).
Converting objects to a
stitch pattern
Objects drawn with the tools in Layout & Editing can
be converted into a stitch pattern, allowing you to
make detailed changes by modifying the position of
individual stitches.
c
“Drawing Shapes” on page 70.
1. Select the object.
2. Click Sew, then Convert to Stitches.
The selected object is converted to stitch
pattern.
→ The dotted line around the converted
pattern indicates that it is a stitch pattern.
Each stitch of the converted pattern can
be edited with the Edit Point tool.
Selecting stitch points of
stitch pattern
1. Click , then .
2. Click the object.
→ The stitch points in the stitch pattern
appear as small empty squares.
3. To select a single stitch point, click an empty
square.
→ The selected stitch point appears as a
small black square.
b Memo:
• If any part of grouped objects, objects set for
hole sewing, and text arranged on shapes is
selected, all objects in the entire group are
converted to stitch patterns.
• Patterns that do not have sewing attributes
applied are deleted when the object is
converted to stitch pattern.
• Object means patterns created with Shape
tools or Text tools or Manual Punch tools.
a Note:
Stitch pattern are surrounded with a dotted
line.
If the object is not surrounded by a dotted
line, it cannot be edited. Stitch points cannot
be edited if the pattern is not a stitch pattern.
b Memo:
• If you click on a jump stitch, the points at
both ends are selected.
• Multiple stitch points can be selected in the
same way that embroidery pattern points
are selected.
c
“Selecting points” on page 56.
• To select all stitch points in the next color,
press the key. To select all stitch
points in the previous color, hold down the
key and press the key.
Tab
Shift Tab
63
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
■ Moving stitch points
1. Drag the selected stitch points to the new
location.
■ Inserting stitch points and jump
stitches
1. Click a line between two stitch points to add a
new point at that position.
■ Deleting stitch points
1. Press the key to delete the selected
stitch point.
Converting a stitch pattern
to blocks
Imported stitch data or patterns converted to stitch
pattern can be converted into blocks (manual
punching data), allowing you to change some of their
sewing attributes and to scale individual colors while
keeping their stitching quality.
1. Select the stitch pattern.
2. Click Sew, then Stitch to Block.
3. Move the slider to select the desired
sensitivity.
4. Click OK.
→ The stitch pattern is converted to grouped
manual punching data.
For details on grouping or ungrouping manual
punching data or editing a part of grouped
manual punching data, refer to “Grouping/
Ungrouping embroidery patterns” on page 55.
b Memo:
• Press the and keys.
→
The entry point of the first thread color
is selected.
• Press the and keys.
→
The exit point of the last thread color
is selected.
• Select at least one point in a given color,
and then press the key.
→
The entry point of the color is
selected.
• Select at least one point in a given color,
and then press the key.
→
The exit point of the color is selected.
a Note
When selecting stitch points, be sure to click
the stitch point (do not click a blank area of
the Design Page), otherwise all of the
selected points will be deselected.
b Memo:
Stitch points are moved in the same way that
embroidery pattern points are moved.
However, if the arrow keys are used, each
press moves the stitch point 0.1 mm
(0.004 inch).
c
“Moving points” on page 57.
b Memo:
To insert a stitch point and change the
previous line into a jump stitch, hold down the
and keys while clicking on the
line.
Ctrl
Home
Ctrl
End
Home
End
Ctrl
Shift
Delete
b Memo:
If the end point of a jump stitch is deleted, that
jump stitch segment is deleted and the
stitches before and after the jump stitch are
connected.
b Memo:
The
Normal
setting should provide
satisfactory results in most cases, but
depending on the complexity of the pattern,
you may need to select a setting more
towards
Coarse
or
Fine
.
a Note:
The
Stitch to Block
command cannot be
used with some stitch pattern imported from
embroidery cards.
c
“Enlarging/Reducing Stitch
Patterns” on page 237 in the
Instruction Manual (PDF format).
64
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Splitting off parts of a stitch
pattern
1. Click on the Tool Box.
2. Click the stitch data.
→ All other stitch data disappear from the
display.
3. Click in the Design Page at the point where
you want to start drawing the enclosing lines.
4. Continue clicking in the Design Page to
specify each corner of the enclosure around
the area to be cut off.
→ The dotted line that is drawn when you
move the pointer changes to a solid line
when the next point is specified.
5. Double-click in the Design Page to specify the
section to be split off.
6. Edit the cutoff section as desired.
Dividing stitch data by
color
■ Dividing stitch data by color
Stitch data can be divided according to the various
colors.
1. Select the one or more stitch data.
2. Click Sew, then Divide Stitches by Color.
→ Dotted lines appear around each part of
the stitch data.
b Memo:
This tool is available only for stitch data.
a Note:
Patterns created with the drawing or Text
tools of Layout & Editing need to be
converted into stitches before they can be
cut with the Split stitch tool.
c
“Converting objects to a stitch
pattern” on page 62.
b Memo:
• To remove the last point that was entered,
click the right mouse button. Each
successive right-click removes points, one
by one, in the opposite order that they were
entered. Once all points are deleted, the
Tool Box buttons are available again,
however, the application remains in Split
stitch mode.
• An enclosure is valid only if it contains stitch
data. If it contains no stitch data, an error
message appears, and the enclosure is
erased, but the application remains in Split
stitch mode.
a Note:
• Only one cutoff section can be specified
from the pattern at one time. Repeat the
procedure for each piece of the pattern
that you want to cut off.
• The cutoff piece moves to the end of the
sewing order and the thread color order
appears in the order selected for the
original pattern.
b Memo:
This function is not available if data other than
stitch data is selected or if grouped
embroidery data containing data other than
stitch data is selected.
Before dividing
After dividing
65
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Displaying a preview of the
embroidery
Once the embroidery design is complete, you can
display a preview of it in order to see how the
stitching is connected, or you can display a realistic
preview of it in order to see how the design will
appear once it is sewn.
■ Preview
Toolbar button:
1. Click , or click Display, then Preview.
→ A preview of the embroidery design
appears.
2. To leave the preview display, repeat step 1.,
or press the key.
■ Realistic Preview
Toolbar button:
1. Click , or click Display, then Realistic
Preview.
→ A realistic preview of the embroidery
design appears.
2. To leave the realistic preview display, repeat
step
1., or press the key.
Esc
a Note:
• The embroidery design cannot be edited
while the realistic preview is displayed.
• The image imported into the Design Page
can also be displayed in the preview if the
appropriate Display Image setting is
selected.
c
“Changing the display of the
background image” on
page 123.
b Memo:
Changing realistic preview settings
Set the realistic preview settings for the
desired realistic preview display.
1. Click Display, then Realistic Preview
Attribute Setting.
→ A Realistic Preview Attribute
Setting dialog box similar to the
ones shown below appears.
2. If necessary, specify settings for
Thread Width, Contrast and
Brightness.
3. Click Apply to display a realistic
preview of the patterns with the new
settings (when the realistic preview is
displayed).
Or, click OK to save the settings for the
next time that the Realistic Preview
function is select (when the realistic
preview is not displayed).
c
“Displaying a preview of the
embroidery” on page 65.
Esc
66
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Checking the stitching
The actual stitching as it will be performed by the
embroidery machine can be viewed using the stitch
simulator.
Toolbar button:
1. Click , or click Display, then Stitch
Simulator.
The Stitch Simulator dialog box appears,
and the embroidery design is cleared from the
Design Page.
2. Click to begin the stitching simulation.
The following operations can be performed if
the corresponding button is clicked.
: Stops the simulation and returns to the
previous display.
: Temporarily stops the simulation. To
restart the simulation, click .
: Drag the slider to adjust the
simulation stitching speed.
: Returns to the beginning of the
previous color.
: Advances to the beginning of the next
color.
: Reverses the stitching by the number
of stitches specified in the stitches/
step selector.
: Advances the stitching by the number
of stitches specified in the stitches/
step selector.
*: Returns to the beginning of the design
in the previous hoop section.
*: Advances to the beginning of the
design in the next hoop section.
* Appear only for patterns created on custom-
sized Design Pages.
The numbers indicate the following.
3. Click in the upper-right corner of the dialog
box to close the dialog box.
Viewing design in the
reference window
A design in the Design Page is displayed in the
Reference Window, giving you an overall view of the
design while you work on a detailed area. The
display area frame (red rectangle) indicates the part
of the pattern displayed in the Design Page.
Toolbar button:
To switch between displaying and hiding the
Reference window, click , click Display, then
Reference Window, or press the shortcut key
().
b Memo:
• The slider shows the current location in the
simulation. In addition, the slider can be
moved to change the position in the
simulation.
• To get a better view of the stitching, zoom in
on the design before opening the
Stitch
Simulator
dialog box.
b Memo:
If a pattern was selected when the
Stitch
Simulator
dialog box was displayed, only the
selected pattern is drawn in the simulation.
Number of the current stitch
Number of the color being draw
n
Pattern section that is displayed
Total number of stitches
Total number of colors used
Total number of hoop sections
in the pattern
This indicator appears only
for patterns created on
custom-sized Design Pages.
F11
67
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
■ Zooming
The Reference Window can be switched to display
either the entire Design Page or only the embroidery
pattern.
1. Click .
→ The image displayed in the Reference
Window changes.
■ Moving the display area frame
The part of the design displayed in the Design Page
can be selected from the Reference Window.
1. Move the pointer over the display area frame.
2. Drag the display area frame so that it
surrounds the desired part of the design.
→ The selected part of the design is
displayed in the Design Page.
■ Redrawing the display area frame
Instead of moving the display area frame, the frame
can be redrawn to display the desired part of the
pattern in the Design Page.
1. Click the area to be displayed, or drag the
pointer over the desired part of the design in
the Reference Window.
→ The display area frame is redrawn, and
the selected part of the design is
displayed in the Design Page.
■ Scaling the display area frame
1. Move the pointer over a corner of the display
area frame.
2. Drag the corner to adjust the display area
frame to the desired size.
68
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Specifying the Design Page Size and Color
The color and size of the Design Page in addition to the color of the background can be changed. You can
select a Design Page size according to the size of hoop that you will be using with your embroidery machine.
You can also specify a custom size for the Design Page for embroidery patterns that will be split and
embroidered in multiple sections.
1. Click Option, then Design Page Property.
2. Select the Design Page size.
To adjust the Design Page size according to
the hoop size, select Hoop Size, and then
select the desired hoop size from the selector.
To specify a custom Design Page size, select
Custom Size, and then type or select the
desired width and height for the Design Page.
c
“Creating Split Embroidery Designs” on
page 176 in the Instruction Manual (PDF
format).
3. From the Page selector, select the desired
color for the Design Page.
4. From the Background selector, select the
desired color for the background.
5. Click OK.
b Memo:
To arrange the pattern in a Design Page
rotated 90 degrees, select the
Rotate 90
Degrees
check box.
b Memo:
To return to the default settings (
100
×
100
mm
(
4”
×
4”
) of
Hoop Size
), click
Default
.
a Note:
• The Design Page sizes
130
×
300 mm
,
100
×
172 mm
indicated by the “*”, are
used to embroider multi-position designs
using a special embroidery hoop attached
to the embroidery machine at three
installation positions.
c
“Creating Design for Multi-
Position Hoops” on page 182 in
the Instruction Manual (PDF
format).
• Do not select a hoop size larger than the
embroidery hoop that can be used with
your machine.
69
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Changing Application Settings
Changing the grid settings
A grid of dotted lines or solid lines can be displayed
or hidden, and the spacing for the grid can be
adjusted.
1. Click Display, then Grid Setup.
2. To display the grid, select the Show Grid
check box.
To hide the grid, clear the Show Grid check
box.
3. To use the grid for aligning patterns or creating
patterns of the same size, select the Snap to
Grid check box.
4. To set the grid spacing, type or select a value
in the Grid interval box.
5. To display the grid as solid lines, select the
with Axes check box.
To display the grid as dots (intersecting points
of the grid) and center lines, clear the with
Axes check box.
6. Click OK to apply the changes and to close the
dialog box.
Changing the measurement
units (mm or inch)
The measurements for values displayed in the
application can be in either millimeters or inches.
1. Click Option, then Select System Unit, and
then select the desired measurement units
(mm or inch).
Changing the ruler settings
The ruler can be displayed or hidden.
1. Click Display, then Ruler.
→ A check mark appears beside the
command, and the ruler appears.
To hide the ruler, click Display, then Ruler
again so that the check mark disappears.
b Memo:
The pointer will move by the amount set in
Grid interval
.
The snap feature works whether or not the
grid is displayed.
Click to switch the measurement units
between millimeters and inches.
70
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Drawing Shapes
Rectangles, rectangles with rounded corners, and curved patterns (regular circles, ovals, arcs, fan shapes,
and arc & strings) can be drawn by using the Rectangle, Circle or Arc tools.
About rectangle, circle and
arc
All of these patterns, except arcs have an outline
and a inside region, and can independently be
assigned different sewing attributes. Arcs are simple
outlines.
Drawing rectangle, circle or
arc Shape
1. Click on the Tool Box.
→ Six buttons appear .
2. Click the button for the shape to be drawn.
→ The Sewing Attributes bar appears.
3. Drag the pointer to draw the shape.
■ Rectangle
The point where you start dragging is considered a
corner of the rectangle. The point where the mouse
button is released is the diagonally opposite corner
of the rectangle.
■
Rectangle with rounded corners
Click to view the current corner radius setting
in the Edge radius selector.
To change the radius of the corners, click the Edge
radius selector, and then type the desired radius
and press the key, or select the desired
value.
b Memo:
• You can change the color and sew type either before or after drawing the shape.
c
“Setting the thread color and sew type” on page 94.
• You can also use the settings in the
Sewing Attribute Setting
dialog box to define other attributes of the
shape.
c
“Specifying sewing attributes” on page 96.
a Note:
When drawing a shape with this tool, select
the shape before drawing. You cannot, for
example, draw a circle, then change it to an
arc afterward.
Rectangle
Circle
Oval
Arc
Fan shape
Arc & string
b Memo:
To draw a square, hold down the key
while dragging the pointer.
Shift
Enter
71
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Drag the pointer to draw a rectangle with corners of
the currently specified radius.
■ Circle or Oval
The point where you start dragging is considered a
corner of an imaginary rectangle around the oval.
The point where you release the mouse button is the
diagonally opposite point of the rectangle. The oval
will fit inside this imaginary rectangle (its greater
axis is along the longer edge of the rectangle, and
its smaller axis is along the smaller edge).
■
Arc , Arc & String or Fan
1. Proceed as you would to draw a circle or an
oval.
→ A radial line appears on the oval when the
mouse button is released.
2. Move the pointer to the start point of the arc,
and then click.
→ The radial line disappears.
3. Move the pointer until the arc/arc & string/fan
has the desired shape, and then click.
b Memo:
Even if an object drawn with the Rectangle
tool is selected, the
Edge radius
selector
appears so that the setting for the radius of the
corners can be changed.
b Memo:
To draw a circle, hold down the key
while dragging the pointer.
Example 1
Edge radius: 0.0 mm
Example 2
Edge radius: 20.0 mm
Shift
Arc
Click at start point.
Move to end point.
Click at end point.
Click at start point.
Arc & String
Move to end point.
Click at end point.
72
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Drawing various shape
The Shape tools allow you to draw 24 types of
shapes, such as hearts, stars or polygons. These
shapes will have an outline and an inside region that
can independently be assigned different sewing
attributes.
1. Click on the Tool Box.
→ The buttons for the 24 types of shapes
appear.
2. Click the button for the shape to be drawn.
3. Drag the pointer in the Design Page.
The point where you start dragging is
considered a corner of an imaginary rectangle
around the shape. The point where you
release the mouse button is the diagonally
opposite point of the shape. The shape will fit
inside this imaginary rectangle.
About straight line and
curve
The Outline tools allow you to add straight lines and
curves to your pattern.
•
Using the tools available with these buttons
draws a closed path. Since this type of pattern
has an outline and an inside region, each part
can be assigned different sew types and colors.
•
Using the tools available with these buttons
draws an open path. Since this type of pattern is
a simple outline and does not have an inside
region, line sew type and color settings can only
be applied to the line itself.
Furthermore, if an image is used as a template,
and can be used to semi-automatically extract
the image boundary.
Fan
Click at start point.
Move to end point.
Click at end point.
b Memo:
To draw the shape while maintaining the
original height-to-width proportion, hold down
the key while dragging the pointer.
b Memo:
If the line of the pattern crosses itself, the
inside region cannot be filled, and the line
must be uncrossed so that the fill can be
applied.
Shift
73
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Drawing straight line and
curve
1. Click on the Tool Box.
→ Eight buttons appear:
: Click points to draw a closed line
constructed of straight lines.
(Shortcut key: )
: Click points to draw an open line
constructed of straight lines.
(Shortcut key: )
: Click points to draw a closed curve.
(Shortcut key: )
: Click points to draw an open curve.
(Shortcut key: )
: When a template image is displayed,
click along the outlines of the image to
draw closed lines tracing the image.
(Shortcut key: )
: When a template image is displayed,
click along the outlines of the image to
draw open lines tracing the image.
(Shortcut key: )
: Drag the pointer to draw a closed
freehand line.
: Drag the pointer to draw an open
freehand line.
2. Click the button for the shape to be drawn.
→ The Sewing Attributes bar appears.
3. Click in the Design Page or drag the pointer to
draw the line.
■ Straight lines/curves
Although the procedure for using the Straight Line
tool is described below, the Curve tool and Semi-
Automatic tool are used in the same way.
1. Click in the Design Page to specify the start
point.
End point
Start point
Open line
Closed line
This closed line crosses itself,
so the regions will not be filled.
End point
Start point
Open curve
Closed curve
This closed curve crosses itself,
so the regions will not be filled.
Z
Z
X
X
C
C
74
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
2. Click in the Design Page to specify the next
point.
3. Continue clicking to specify every point, and
then double-click the last point, or press the
key.
■ Freehand lines
1. Drag the pointer to draw the line.
2. Release the mouse button to finish drawing.
Changing the attributes of
line ends
The attribute of the ends of lines drawn with the
Outline tool can be changed.
1. Select an object drawn with an Outline tool.
c
“Selecting patterns” on page 52.
→ The Path shape selector appears in the
Sewing Attributes bar.
2. From the selector, select the desired attribute
of the line ends.
→ The line changes to the selected line end
attribute.
b Memo:
To remove the last point that was entered,
click the right mouse button, or press the
key.
BackSpace
Enter
b Memo:
• You can freely switch between the different
line types either by clicking a different
button or by pressing the shortcut key.
• When drawing a straight line, hold down the
key while moving the pointer to draw
vertically or horizontally.
• A template image is needed in order to draw
using the Semi-Automatic tool. If there is no
image, this tool will draw like the Straight
Line tool.
c
“Importing Image Data” on
page 120.
• Even after the pattern is drawn, you can
transform straight lines into curves and vice
versa.
c
“Transforming straight lines into
curves or curves into straight
lines” on page 58.
Shift
75
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Preventing overlapping
stitching (hole sewing)
By specifying hole sewing, the stitching in
overlapping regions will not be sewn twice. Hole
sewing can be set only when one region completely
encloses another.
1. Select a pair of patterns, for example, a circle
included in an oval.
2. Click Sew, then Set hole sewing.
→ If the selected pair can be set for hole
sewing, the following message appears.
→ If the selected pair cannot be set for hole
sewing, the error message appears.
3. Click OK to remove the message.
■ Canceling hole sewing
1. Select a pattern that has been set for hole
sewing.
2. Click Sew, then Cancel hole sewing.
The pair of patterns can now be moved
independently.
Changing shapes of
overlapped patterns
Embroidery patterns created with the Rectangle,
Circle or Arc tools, Shape tools or the Outline tools
can be selected to remove overlapping regions or to
be merged.
■ Removing overlapping
Overlapped patterns can be set so that the
overlapping region is removed.
When this is applied to multiple patterns, the
region overlapped by other patterns is cut out.
1. Select two or more overlapped patterns.
2. Click Sew, then Remove Overlaps.
→ The region overlapped by other patterns
is removed.
→ If this cannot be applied to the selected
patterns, an error message appears.
b Memo:
For a pair to be valid, one of the patterns must
be completely enclosed within the other
pattern, and not contain text, manual
punching patterns or stitch data.
Valid
Invalid
Sewn twice Sewn once
Hole sewing not set Hole sewing set
b Memo:
• Once a pair of patterns has been set for
hole sewing, they will move together if you
try to move one of the patterns.
• When setting hole sewing to three or more
objects, first set hole sewing to two objects.
After this, select the first two grouped
objects and the next one object and repeat
the hole sewing setting.
• The outline of patterns created with the
Outline, Fan Shape and Arc & String tools
can be edited with the Point Edit tool.
a Note:
To see better what the hole sewing setting
does, previewing the patterns before and
after setting hole sewing.
c
“Displaying a preview of the
embroidery” on page 65.
76
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
• When partially overlapped
• When enclosed
• When enclosed by the last pattern in the sewing
order
■ Merging
Overlapped patterns can be merged together.
When this is applied to multiple patterns, the
color and sew type of the last pattern drawn
(topmost pattern) is applied to the merged
pattern.
1. Select two or more overlapped patterns.
2. Click Sew, then Merge.
→ All of the selected patterns are merged
together.
→ If this cannot be applied to the selected
patterns, an error message appears.
• When partially overlapped
• When enclosed
• When enclosed by the last pattern in the sewing
order
First pattern in the sewing order
Second pattern in the sewing order
Third pattern in the sewing order
First pattern in the sewing order
Second pattern in the sewing order
Third pattern in the sewing order
77
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Manually Creating Professional-Level
Embroidery Patterns (Manual Punching)
When fill stitches or satin stitches have been specified for region sewing, the angle of the stitching over the
region is either all in the same direction or in a direction depending on the shape. However, if the Manual
Punch tools are used, the sewing angle can be adjusted as desired to create patterns that appear more like
manual embroidery.
For example, if fill stitches or satin stitches have been specified for a region with the following shape, the
stitching will appear as shown below.
If a manual punching pattern is created using the above image as a guide, the stitching will appear as shown
below.
In addition, feathered edge settings can be specified for manual punch patterns. By reducing the stitch density
or specifying the length of the stitching, a feathered outline can be applied to the pattern.
c
Refer to “Featherd edge” in “Manual punch” on page 108.
<Shape>
Satin stitch
Fill stitch
<Manual punching>
Satin stitch
Fill stitch
The lines drawn in the pattern
show the direction of the stitching.
The stitching is created so that it
turns around the center of the
radial stitching.
A three-dimensional appearance, like the flower petals, can be
created for the flat design of this shape.
Example: Fill stitch
Different variations can be applied to the flower petals.
78
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
The following example shows how the Manual
Punch tools are used to draw a beard over image of
the reindeer (Rudolph.bmp), which is used as a
template.
The template and finished pattern are provided in
the following folder.
Documents (My Documents)\PE-DESIGN8\
Sample\Layout & Editing\Manual Punch
1. Import the file Rudolph.bmp.
c
“Importing Image Data” on page 120.
2. Click on the Tool Box.
→ Five buttons appear:
.
:
This is used for creating straight block-
type punching patterns (region sewing).
(Shortcut key: )
:
This is used for creating curved block-
type punching patterns (region sewing).
(Shortcut key: )
: This is used for semi-automatically
creating straight block-type punching
patterns.
By semi-automatically tracing, points
can be specified along the lines of a
template.
(Shortcut key: )
: This is used for creating running-type
punching patterns (line sewing).
(Shortcut key: )
: This is used for creating feed-type
punching patterns (jump stitches).
(Shortcut key: )
c
“Jump Stitch and Jump Stitch Trimming”
on page 238 in the Instruction Manual
(PDF format).
While creating a manual punching pattern,
you can switch between the various tools. This
is very easy if the shortcut keys are used.
3. Click to start drawing a running-type
pattern.
→ The Sewing Attributes bar appears.
4. Select Fill Stitch as the block sew type and
SILVER as the punch color.
b Memo:
If the semi-automatic block-type punch tool is
used for drawing, an image must be imported
to be used as a template.
Z
X
b Memo:
• The color and sew type can be also be
changed after the pattern is created.
c
“Color” on page 95 and “Sew
type” on page 96.
• You can also use the settings in the
Sewing
Attribute Setting
dialog box.
c
“Specifying sewing attributes” on
page 96.
If you do not change these settings at this
time, the current settings will be applied.
However, you can modify the sewing
attributes at any time.
C
V
B
79
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
5. Click in the Design Page to specify points 1
(start point) through 12.
6. After clicking point 12 (the last point of the
running-type pattern), click , and then
click in the Design Page to specify point 13
througn 15.
→ The area surrounded by the line is
specified as a block.
7. Click in the Design Page to specify points 16
through 23.
→ The blocks A through E will be created, in
order.
8. Click in the Design Page to specify points 24
through 48.
9. Click point 49 (the last point of the pattern),
and then press the key or double-click
the point to complete the pattern.
b Memo:
To remove the last point that was entered,
press the key, or click the right
mouse button.
1
2
3
45
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
BackSpace
13
15
14
23
A
21
19
17
16
18
20
22
B
C
E
D
b Memo:
• If the shape cannot be drawn with the
Manual Punch tools as desired, points can
be edited to adjust the shape.
c
“Reshaping Embroidery Patterns”
on page 56.
• Line sewing is not created along outlines of
patterns drawn with , or .
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
48
46
44
42
40
38
36
34
32
30
28
26
24
Enter
49
80
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Adding Text
Entering text/Small text
1. Click on the Tool Box.
→ Three buttons appear: .
2. Click or .
: Text
: Small text
→ The Sewing Attributes bar appears.
3. If necessary, change the font, text size, color
and sew type.
4. Click in the Design Page.
→ The Edit Text Letters dialog box
appears, containing a chart with all
characters available with the selected
font.
5. Type the text.
6. Click OK.
→ The text is displayed in the Design Page.
b Memo:
• You can change the font, text size, color,
and sew type either before or after creating
the text.
c
“Font” on page 81, “Text Size” on
page 83, “Color” on page 95 and
“Sew type” on page 96.
• You can also use the settings in the
Text
Attribute Setting
dialog box to define other
attributes of the text.
c
“Specifying text attributes” on
page 83.
• You can also use the settings in the
Sewing
Attribute Setting
dialog box to define other
attributes for text.
c
“Specifying sewing attributes” on
page 96.
a Note:
• If one of the fonts provided with this
application (01 to 35) or custom fonts is
selected, the line sew type cannot be
selected.
• A sew type cannot be selected for small
text.
b Memo:
• Press the key to enter a new line of
text.
• You can also enter a character by selecting
it in the character table, then clicking
Insert
,
or simply by double-clicking it. This is
particularly useful if you have to enter
accented characters that are not available
on your keyboard.
b Memo:
• If you want to edit the entered text, select
it, and then select the menu command
Text – Edit Letters. Edit the text in the
Edit Text Letters dialog box that
appears.
c
“Editing entered text” on page 83.
• The Small Text tool is used to create text
patterns where the jump stitches between
the characters do not need to be cut.
a Note:
• If the entered characters are not available
with the selected font or if the text cannot
be converted to an embroidery pattern, an
error message appears. Click
OK
to close
the message and return to the
Edit Text
Letters
dialog box, where you can correct
the text.
Enter
81
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Selecting text attributes
Text attributes can be specified with the Font
selector and Text Size selector.
■ Font
1. Click in the Font selector.
→ A list of fonts appears when clicking on
the menu arrow at the right.
2. Click the desired font.
→ The setting is applied to all text patterns
that you will create, until the setting is
changed.
→ If text patterns or characters in a text
pattern were selected, the setting is also
applied to the selected text.
The available fonts and the types of characters
available with each font are listed below.
• Built-in Fonts
a Note:
Precautions for small text
• Reduce the thread tension to less than
what is used when embroidering normal
designs.
• Sew at a speed slower than what is used
when embroidering normal designs.
(For details on adjusting the thread
tension and sewing speed, refer to the
Instruction Manual provided with your
embroidery machine.)
• For best results when sewing small font
patterns, do not cut the jump stitches
between the characters. (For details on
setting the machine for thread cutting,
refer to the Instruction Manual for the
embroidery machine.)
b Memo:
The
Font
selector and
Text Size
selector
appear when on the Tool Box is
selected. It also appears when text or a
character in the Design Page has been
selected.
a Note:
Embroidering text
• A font other than small text set to a
small character size may not be
embroidered correctly. We recommend
setting the character size to 10 mm or
more.
• Depending on the design, text using a
TrueType font may not be correctly
converted to an embroidery pattern.
Select a TrueType font where
characters have an even line
thickness, such as with Arial.
Text
Types of characters
available
Font sample
Font number
82
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
•Custom Fonts
c
“Creating Custom Fonts (Font Creator)”
on page 225 in the Instruction Manual
(PDF format).
• TrueType Fonts
The names and samples of installed TrueType
fonts appear after the Custom Fonts.
c
“Entering text/Small text” on page 80.
Text
Small text
Uppercase letters of the English
alphabet
Lowercase letters of the English
alphabet
Numerals
Punctuation marks, brackets and
other symbols
Uppercase and lowercase
accented letters
Size for small text (appears only
for small text)
b Memo:
Only built-in fonts can be used with small text.
PEF files created with Font Creator
and saved in the MyFont folder
where PE-DESIGN was installed
appear as user-defined fonts after the
fonts listed in the table above.
The UD icon appears on custom
fonts.
b Memo:
TrueType font settings can be changed in the
TrueType Font Attribute Setting
dialog box,
which is displayed by clicking the menu
command
Text – TrueType Font Attribute
Setting
.
c
“Specifying TrueType text
attributes” on page 89.
a Note:
Text created using certain TrueType fonts
may not be converted correctly into an
embroidery pattern due to the shape of the
character. These characters cannot be
embroidered correctly. Test sew before
embroidering on your project.
In addition, text created using some
TrueType fonts cannot be converted at all.
Built-in Fonts
Custom Fonts
TrueType Fonts
83
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
■ Text Size
1. Click in the Text Size selector.
2. Type the desired height and press the
key, or click the desired value.
→ The setting is applied to all text patterns
that you will create, until the setting is
changed.
→ If text patterns or characters in a text
pattern were selected, the setting is also
applied to the selected text.
c
“Entering text/Small text” on page 80.
Editing entered text
Text that has been entered can easily be edited.
1. Select the text or small text.
2. Click Text, then Edit Letters.
3. The selected text is displayed in the text field.
4. Edit the text as needed.
5. Click OK.
→ The edited text is displayed in the Design
Page.
c
“Entering text/Small text” on page 80.
Specifying text attributes
Various character attributes for text can be set in the
Text Attribute Setting dialog box.
The settings are applied to the text pattern each
time the settings are changed.
1. Select the text or small text.
2. Click Text, then Text Attribute Setting.
c
“Thread colors, sewing attributes and text
attributes” on page 47.
3. If necessary, change the text attributes.
a Note:
You cannot edit more than one text pattern
at a time. If you select more than one text
pattern, this menu command is not available.
Enter
b Memo:
To return a parameter to its default setting,
click beside it.
Kerning
Sets the spacing
between individual
characters.
0.0 mm
5.0 mm
(between “A”
and “b”)
Vertical
Offset
Moves the text vertically.
0.0 mm
2.0 mm
Rotate
angle
Rotates the characters.
0 degree
20 degrees
84
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
■ Transforming text
A preset transform shape can be applied to text.
1. Select the text.
2. Select the Transform check box, and then
click the transformation shape button.
→ Depending on the selected shape, a
dotted line and or appear
around the text.
3. Drag to transform the text.
To return the transformed text to its original
shape, clear the Transform check box.
Character
Spacing
Sets the spacing
between all characters.
0.0 mm
2.0 mm
Line
Spacing
Sets the spacing
between lines as a per-
centage of the character
height.
100%
150%
Alignment
Aligns several lines of text
to the left, center or right.
Left
Center
Right
Direction
Specifies whether
characters will be
positioned horizontally
or vertically.
Horizontal
Vertical
b Memo:
• Vertical text will be displayed vertically on
the Design Page.
•Both
Kerning
and
Character Spacing
set
the spacing between characters.
Character
Spacing
is always applied to the entire text
pattern, while
Kerning
can be applied to
individual characters. Applying
Kerning
to
the entire text in the pattern is the same as
specifying
Character Spacing
. Refer to
“Selecting characters” on page 85 for more
details about selecting individual characters
in a text pattern.
b Memo:
Small text cannot be transformed.
a Note:
A text pattern created from a TrueType font
contains data for both line and region
sewing. Therefore, if this command is
selected, depending on the form of the
TrueType font, there may be a gap between
the line and the region in the text.
b Memo:
• can only be dragged vertically.
• can only be dragged horizontally.
b Memo:
• Text can be arranged on an arc if or
is selected.
• The settings specified in the
Text Attribute
Setting
dialog box are applied to all text patterns
that you create, until the settings are changed.
85
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Selecting characters
The font, character size, thread color, sew type and
other attributes can be changed for each character
that is selected.
1. Click , then .
2. Click the text or small text.
→ The points in the text appear as small
empty squares.
3. To select a single character, click the point for
the character.
To select multiple characters, hold down the
key and click each point for the other
characters, or drag the pointer over the points
of characters.
→ The points for the selected characters
appear as a small black squares.
→ The handles appear on the character.
→ The Sewing Attributes bar appears.
1 Rotation handle
2 Size handle
3 Vertical offset handle
Easy changes to the character
size and attributes
You can easily use drag operations to change the
size and text attributes (character spacing, vertical
offset, rotation) for text, small text, and monogram
characters.
■ Changing the size
1. Bring the pointer onto the upper right
handle.
2. Drag the handle.
→ The size of the character outline
displayed with dotted lines changes.
3. When you release the mouse button, the
character size is changed.
→ The new size is displayed on the Sewing
Attributes bar.
b Memo:
• Multiple points can be selected and the
selected points can be changed in the same
way that embroidery pattern points are
selected.
c
“Selecting points” on page 56.
• With TrueType fonts, the outline can be set
to be sewn or not, and settings can be
selected for the color and sew type.
Ctrl
2
1
3
b Memo:
The character size of small text can be
increased. However the stitching will become
coarse.
86
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
■ Changing the character spacing
1. Place the pointer onto the character body
other than the handles and drag
the character horizontally.
→ The character outline displayed with
dotted lines moves.
2. When you release the mouse button, the
character spacing is changed.
→ When the Text Attribute Setting dialog
box is opened, the new kerning is
displayed.
■ Changing the vertical offset
1. Bring the pointer onto the lower handle.
2. Drag the handle vertically.
→ The character outline displayed with
dotted lines moves.
3. When you release the mouse button, the
character offset is changed.
→ When the Text Attribute Setting dialog
box is opened, the new vertical offset is
displayed.
87
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
■ Rotating the characters
1. Bring the pointer onto the handle.
2. Drag the handle.
→ The character outline displayed with
dotted lines rotates.
3. When you release the mouse button, the
character angle is changed.
→ When the Text Attribute Setting dialog
box is opened, the new rotation angle is
displayed.
Specifying text
arrangement
A line of text can be arranged along a path.
c
“Drawing Shapes” on page 70.
Toolbar button:
1. Select the text or small text and a path.
2. Click , or click Text, then Fit Text to
Path Setting.
3. From the Horizontal Alignment, Vertical
Alignment and Text Orientation selectors,
select the desired settings.
4. Click OK to apply the settings.
b Memo:
Monogram characters can not be rotated.
b Memo:
• Settings specified in the
Text Attribute
Setting
dialog box are applied to all
selected characters.
• To return to the default settings, click .
• The settings specified in the
Text Attribute
Setting
dialog box are applied to all text
patterns that you create, until the settings
are changed.
b Memo:
To position the text on the other side of the
path, check
the other side
check box.
a Note:
When text arrangement is specified, the text
transformation is cancelled. Only one string of
text can be arranged on a single path.
b Memo:
To change the position of text on the path,
select the text, and then drag it.
c
“Memo” on page 37.
88
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
■ Canceling text arrangement
The text arrangement on a path can be cancelled.
Toolbar button:
1. Select text or small text that is arranged on a
path (Fit to Path).
2. Click , or click Text, then Release Text
from Path.
c
“Specifying text arrangement” on
page 87.
Horizontal Alignment
Sets the distribution of characters along
the path.
Vertical Alignment
Sets the distance between the text and
the path.
Text Orientation
Sets the orientation of the characters
relative to the path.
the other side Sets the side for arrangement.
89
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Specifying TrueType text
attributes
Various character attributes, such as the style, can
be specified for TrueType fonts converted to an
embroidery pattern.
1. Select the TrueType text.
2. Click Text, then TrueType Font Attribute
Setting.
→ A dialog box appears. If any characters
converted from a TrueType font are
selected, the attributes for the selected
characters are displayed.
3. To change the font style, select the desired
style from the Font style list.
4. To change the character set for the font, select
the desired character set from the Script
selector.
5. Click OK to set the attributes and to close the
dialog box.
→ The attribute settings are applied to all
text patterns that you will create from a
TrueType font, until the setting is
changed.
c
“Entering text/Small text” on page 80 and
“Specifying text attributes” on page 83.
Converting text to outline
pattern
Text in a TrueType font can be converted to an
outline pattern.
1. Select text in a TrueType font.
2. Click Text, then Convert to Outline Object.
→ The selected text is converted to outlines.
No sewing attributes are specified for the
converted outline; therefore, it appears as
dotted lines. Specify the sewing attributes
as necessary.
c
“Creating Outlined Characters (Using
Text Converted to Outline Object)” on
page 240 in the Instruction Manual (PDF
format).
a Note:
• The settings for
Font style
and
Script
differ depending on the TrueType font that
is selected.
• If text created from multiple TrueType
fonts is selected, this command is not
available.
In addition, if text of the same font but
different font styles or scripts is selected,
this dialog box appears with the attribute
settings for the first letter in the text.
In either case mentioned above, selecting
only one character from within text
displays a dialog box containing only that
character’s attributes.
b Memo:
In order to prevent the pattern from losing its
shape, group the outlines or specify hole
sewing.
90
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Entering Monograms
The monogram function allows you to create monograms composed of one to three or less uppercase letters
and arrange a decorative pattern around them.
1. Click on the Tool Box.
→ Three buttons appear: .
2. Click .
→ The Sewing Attributes bar appears.
3. If necessary, change the font, text size, color
and sew type.
4. Click in the Design Page.
5. Type the monogram text (uppercase
characters).
6. To add a decorative pattern around or at the
sides of the monogram, select Add
Decorative Pattern check box, and then click
Select Pattern.
7. Click a decorative pattern to select it, and then
click Select (or double-click the pattern) to
close the Decorative Pattern dialog box and
display the pattern in the preview box of the
Edit Monogram Letters dialog box.
8. Click OK.
→ The monogram is displayed in the Design
Page with the selected decorative pattern.
9. Click on the Tool Box, select the
decorative pattern, and then adjust its size
and position.
b Memo:
•
Diamond
and
Script
are fonts exclusively
for monograms. You can also use other
fonts.
• If a TrueType font was selected, the Sewing
Attributes bar appears as shown below so
the thread color and sew type for the line
can be selected.
b Memo:
• You can change the font, text size, color,
and sew type either before or after creating
the monogram.
c
“Monogram font” on page 91,
“Monogram Size” on page 91,
“Color” on page 95 and “Sew
type” on page 96.
• You can also use the settings in the
Sewing
Attribute Setting
dialog box to define other
attributes of the monogram.
c
“Specifying sewing attributes” on
page 96.
b Memo:
• You can also enter a character by selecting
it in the character table, then clicking
Insert
,
or simply by double-clicking it.
• You can enter up to three uppercase
characters with the monogram function.
a Note:
You cannot insert multiple lines. If you press
the key, the dialog closes and the
monogram pattern is displayed in the Design
Page.
Enter
91
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
10. If necessary, change the thread color and sew
type in the Sewing Attributes bar for the
monogram.
Editing monograms
Attributes can be specified with the Monogram font
selector and Monogram Size selector.
■ Monogram font
1. Click in the Font selector.
→ A list of monogram fonts appears.
2. Click the desired font.
→ The setting is applied to all monogram
patterns that you will create, until the
setting is changed.
→ If a monogram pattern was selected, the
setting is also applied to the selected
monogram.
■ Monogram Size
1. Click in the Monogram Size selector.
2. Type the desired height and press the
key, or click the desired value.
→ The setting is applied to all monogram
patterns that you will create, until the
setting is changed.
→ If a monogram pattern was selected, the
setting is also applied to the selected
monogram.
■ Editing the monogram text
1. Select the monogram pattern.
2. Click Text, then Edit Letters.
→ The Edit Monogram Letters dialog box
appears, where the characters of the
selected monogram pattern are displayed
in the text field.
3. Edit the text as needed.
b Memo:
• Drag the handle to adjust the selected
pattern to the desired size.
c
“Scaling patterns” on page 53.
• The shape of the pointer changes to
when the selected object can be moved.
b Memo:
The
Monogram font
selector and
Monogram
Size
selector appear in the Sewing Attributes
bar when on the Tool Box is selected. It
also appears when a monogram pattern in the
Design Page has been selected.
a Note:
You cannot edit more than one monogram
pattern at a time. If you select more than one
monogram pattern, this menu command is
not available.
b Memo:
• To change the decorative pattern, click
Select Pattern
, and then select the new
pattern in the
Decorative Pattern
dialog
box that appeared. Then, select the old
decorative pattern in the Design Page and
delete it.
• To remove the decorative pattern, select it
in the Design Page, and then delete it.
Enter
92
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
4. Click OK.
→ The edited monogram pattern is
displayed in the Design Page.
c
“Entering Monograms” on page 90.
■ Editing single characters
The thread color, character size, character spacing
and vertical offset for each letter in a monogram can
be specified in the same way that attributes are
specified for text patterns. The characters cannot be
rotated.
c
“Selecting characters” on page 85 and
“Easy changes to the character size and
attributes” on page 85.
93
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Applying Sewing Attributes to Lines and
Regions
The Sewing Attributes bar allows you to set the
following attributes:
• geometric attributes (rectangle edge
radius, and path shape)
• text attributes (font, size)
• embroidery attributes (thread color and
sew type, outline and inside region on/off)
The sewing attributes that are available depend on
the tool selected in Tool Box, and the type of
embroidery pattern selected.
Example 1: When a rectangle is selected
Example 2: When a text is selected
When the pointer is positioned over a button or
selector in the Sewing Attributes bar, a label
indicating the name of that element appears. In the
following instructions, we will refer to the elements
of the Sewing Attributes bar according to these
labels.
As a general rule, the different characteristics
available for a given pattern can be set either just
before creating the pattern, or after the pattern is
created. For example, when drawing a rectangle,
you can set the colors and the corner radius just
after starting the rectangle drawing mode. When the
rectangle is created, you can select it and change its
characteristics.
Geometric attributes
Text attributes
Embroidery attributes
Edge radius
: Sets the corner radius
of rectangles.
c
“Rectangle with rounded
corners” on page 70.
Path shape: Opens and closes
broken lines and curves.
c
“Changing the attributes of
line ends” on page 74.
Font: Selects a font for text.
c
“Font” on page 81.
Text Size: Selects the size for text.
c
“Text Size” on page 83.
Line sew: Switches on/off sewing
for the line. When sewing for the
outline is switched off, it is not sewn
(and you cannot set its color or sew
type).
c
“Line sew / Region sew” on
page 94.
Region sew: Switches on/off
sewing for the region. When sewing
for the inside region is switched off,
it is not sewn (and you cannot set
its color or sew type).
c
“Line sew / Region sew” on
page 94.
Line color, Region color, Text
color, Punch color: Sets the thread
color for outlines, inside regions, text
and manual punching patterns.
c
“Color” on page 95.
Special colors
c
“Special colors” on page 95.
Line sew type: Sets the sew type
for the outlines.
c
“Sew type” on page 96.
Region sew type: Sets the sew
type for an inside region, text and
manual punching patterns.
c
“Sew type” on page 96.
94
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Setting the thread color and
sew type
All patterns can be assigned at least one color and
sew type. Patterns with an outline and an inside
region can be assigned two different thread colors
and sew types. If a gradation is applied to an area,
an additional color can be specified to create a
blending effect. (For details on gradations, refer to
“Creating a gradation/blending” on page 115.) In
addition, each character in a text pattern can be
assigned individual thread colors and sew types.
Patterns with an outline and a inside region: text
converted from TrueType fonts, circles, fan shapes,
arcs & strings, rectangles, 24 shapes, closed broken
lines, and closed curves. For these patterns, it is
possible to switch on and off sewing for the outline
and the regions.
Patterns with only an outline: arcs, open broken
lines, and open curves. For these patterns, it is still
possible to switch on and off sewing for the outline.
Patterns with only a region: text created with fonts
provided with this application, text created with
custom fonts and manual punching patterns. For
these patterns, it is not possible to switch on and off
sewing of the inside region.
Manual punching patterns: You can set a color and
a sew type for manual punching patterns.
■ Line sew
/
Region sew
switches on/off line sewing, switches on/
off region sewing.
Clicking the button switches between the two
settings.
On: The Line color/Region color button and the
Line sew type/Region sew type selector are
displayed.
Off: The Line color/Region color button and the
Line sew type/Region sew type selector are
not displayed.
Line sewing on: Line sewing off:
c
“Color” on page 95 and “Sew type” on
page 96.
b Memo:
• The color and sew type are applied to all
patterns of the same type that you create,
until the settings are changed. The color
button of each category shows the current
color for that category.
• If a pattern is selected, the color and sew
type are applied to the selected pattern.
b Memo:
• When line sewing or region sewing is
switched off, it is not sewn (and the color or
sew type cannot be selected).
a Note:
The Region sewing attribute cannot be set
inside the closed path region in case a
pattern outline across by itself although the
pattern is drawn by the straight line or the
curved line tool with closed path attribute.
Line sew
Line color
Line sew type
Region sew
Region color
Region sew type
Region sewing on: Region sewing off:
95
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
■ Color
Click this button to set the thread color for outlines,
inside regions, texts and manual punching patterns.
1. Click the Color button.
• Palette mode
• List mode
2. From the Thread Chart selector, select a
thread brand or your user thread chart.
3. From the list of thread colors, select the
desired color.
c
For details on specifying a user thread
chart or for information on how machines
handle thread colors, refer to “Editing user
thread color lists” on page 110.
c
For details on changing thread colors for
stitch patterns, refer to “Changing colors”
on page 118.
■ Special colors
• NOT DEFINED: Embroidery machines that
feature automatic thread color display will
automatically switch the display to the
specified color. If you are using such a
machine and if you want to be able to select
manually the color for a monochrome
pattern, you can select NOT DEFINED.
• Colors for creating appliqués: You can
create appliqués using the three special
colors shown in the above illustration.
APPLIQUE MATERIAL marks the outline
of the region to cut from the appliqué
material.
b Memo:
• To view the details about the thread colors,
click on
To List mode
button in the bottom
left corner of the
Thread Color
dialog.
• To view the colors without the details, click
on
To Palette mode
button in the bottom
left corner of the
Thread Color
dialog.
b Memo:
At the top of the
Thread Color
dialog box for
TrueType font character patterns and outline
data, you can select the type of stitching
(
Line
,
Region1
or
Region2
) whose color is
being selected.
Line:
Line color
Region1:
Region color
Region2:
Additional color for blending
(
Region 2
can only be selected if a gradation
with a blending effect is specified.)
c
“Creating a gradation/blending”
on page 115.
NOT
DEFINED
APPLIQUE MATERIAL
APPLIQUE
APPLIQUE
POSITION
96
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
APPLIQUE POSITION marks the position
on the backing material where the appliqué
must be sewn.
APPLIQUE sews the appliqué on the
backing material.
■ Sew type
Use these to set the sew type for outlines, inside
regions, text, and manual punching patterns.
1. Click in a sew type selector.
→ The available settings that appear differ
depending on the object that is selected.
2. Click the desired sew type.
c
“Line sew / Region sew” on page 94 and
“Specifying sewing attributes” below.
Specifying sewing
attributes
Various sewing attributes for lines and regions can
be set in the Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box.
1. Select an embroidery stitch pattern, the Draw
tool or the Text tool.
2. Click Sew, then Sewing Attribute Setting.
c
“Layout & Editing Window” on page 47.
Beginner mode:
Expert mode:
b Memo:
By using the Applique Wizard, appliqués can
easily be created.
c
“Creating appliqués (Applique
Wizard)” on page 137.
Object
type
Line sew type
settings
Region sew type
settings
Text
(built-in
fonts,
custom
fonts)
None
Satin, Fill, and Prog. Fill
(programmable fill) Stitch
Text
(TrueType
fonts)
Zigzag,
Running,
Triple, Motif,
and E/V Stitch
Text
(Small font)
None None
Manual
punching
pattern
None
Satin, Fill, Prog. Fill
(programmable fill stitch),
Piping, and Motif Stitch
Others
Zigzag,
Running,
Triple, Motif,
and E/V Stitch
Satin, Fill, Prog. Fill
(programmable fill), Piping,
Motif, Cross, Concentric
Circle, Radial, Spiral, and
Stippling Stitch
Adjust
with slider.
1
2
3
4
5
Enter
a value.
1
2
3
4
5
97
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
1 Click to return to the default setting.
2 Click to switch the mode.
3 Click to load/save the sewing settings.
4 Click to switch between displaying and
hiding the hint view.
5Hint view
With each change in the settings, a preview of
the stitching can be checked here.
3. To display only basic sewing attributes and
simpler settings, click To Beginner mode.
To display all of the sewing attributes and
settings available for the selected sew type,
click To Expert mode.
4. If necessary, change the sewing attributes
displayed under Line sew or Region sew.
→ The settings are applied to the
embroidery pattern each time the settings
are changed.
c
For details on the different sewing
attributes and settings, refer to “Line
sewing attributes” on page 98 and
“Region sewing attributes” on page 101.
In addition, frequently used sewing
attributes can be saved. For details, refer
to “Saving the settings in a list” on
page 109.
b Memo:
The sewing attributes displayed in the dialog
box depend on the selected sew type.
b Memo:
Settings that cannot be selected in Beginner
mode are retained from the previous setting in
Expert mode.
a Note:
• All settings made in the dialog box are
retained and will be applied regardless of
the mode, until they are changed.
• The sew type cannot be selected for small
text.
98
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
■ Line sewing attributes
The available attributes differ depending on the selected sew type.
Zigzag stitch
Running stitch
Triple stitch
Under sewing
To specify underlay stitching, select the check box.
Use underlay stitching to prevent shrinking during
stitching.
Off On
Zigzag width Specify the width of the satin stitching.
Narrow Wide
Density
Specify the stitch density as the number of threads
per millimeter.
Coarse Fine
Half Stitch
To specify half stitching, select the check box.
If one side of the zigzag stitching is dense, half
stitches will be sewn automatically to provide a more
even stitch density.
Available for text and objects created with the
drawing tools.
Off
On
Sharp Corners Specify how pointed corners are sewn.
Run pitch Specify the run pitch (length of one stitch).
Short Long
Run time(s) Specify the number of times the outline is sewn.
1 time 5 times
Run pitch Specify the run pitch (length of one stitch).
Short Long
The inside
stitching is dense.
The stitching is adjusted
to a more even density.
99
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Motif stitch
Select a pattern for the motif stitch.
Click to display the Browse dialog box. Select a folder, and then select the desired pattern (.pmf
file) from the list of patterns that appears.
Specify the pattern size. The pattern can be
enlarged or reduced while maintaining the width-to-
height proportion.
Smaller Larger
1 Height
(vertical
length)
Specify the pattern height.
Short Tall
2 Width
(horizontal
length)
Specify the pattern width.
Short Long
H-Arrange
(horizontal
arrangement)
Specify the arrangement of the patterns along a
horizontal axis.
All patterns or each pattern can be flipped along the
horizontal axis.
Normal
Mirror
Alternate
V-Arrange
(vertical
arrangement)
Specify the arrangement of the patterns along a
vertical axis.
All patterns or each pattern can be flipped along the
vertical axis.
Normal
Mirror
Alternate
Spacing
Specify the spacing of the patterns.
Narrow Wide
Run pitch Specify the run pitch (length of one stitch).
Short Long
1
2
100
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
E/V stitch
Select the E stitch or the V stitch.
E Stitch
1 Interval
Specify the distance
between strokes.
Narrow Wide
2 Stroke
width
Specify the stroke
height.
Short Long
3 Run
pitch
Specify the run pitch
(length of one stitch)
of the line.
Narrow Wide
Run time(s)
Specify the number of times the line
is sewn.
1 time 5 times
Stroke time(s)
Specify the number of times each
stroke is sewn.
1 time 3 times
Arrange
Specify the stroke direction (inside/
outside).
V Stitch
1 Interval
Specify the distance
between strokes.
Narrow Wide
2 Stroke
width
Specify the stroke
height.
Short Long
3 Run
pitch
Specify the run pitch
(length of one stitch)
of the line.
Narrow Wide
Run time(s)
Specify the number of times the
stitching is sewn.
With the V stitch, the line and the
strokes are sewn the same number
of times.
1 time 5 times
Arrange
Specify the stroke direction (inside/
outside).
1
2
3
12
3
101
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
■ Region sewing attributes
The available attributes differ depending on the selected sew type.
Satin stitch
Under
sewing
To specify underlay stitching, select the check box, and then specify settings for the following attributes.
Use underlay stitching to prevent shrinking during stitching.
Specify the type of underlay stitching to be sewn.
• With text and manual punching patterns • With other patterns
Density
Select Dense, Medium or Light as the density for the underlay stitching.
Density
Specify the stitch density as the number of threads per
millimeter.
Coarse Fine
Gradation
To specify a gradation (shading) for the density, select the
check box.
This cannot be specified under the following conditions.
• The sewing direction is set to Variable
• Text and manual punching patterns
Click Pattern to set the gradation pattern.
c
“Creating a gradation/blending” on page 115.
Off On
Edge only
Region only (single layer of zigzag
shaped stitches)
Region only (single layer of piping
stitches)
Edge and region (single layer of
zigzag shaped stitches)
Region only (double layer of zigzag
shaped and piping stitches)
Single: Sews perpendicular to the
specified sewing direction.
Double: Sews at a 45° and –45° angle
to the specified sewing direction.
102
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Direction
Specify the sewing direction course.
This cannot be specified for text and manual punching
patterns.
Constant: Sews at a fixed angle.
Drag or select a value to specify the angle.
Constant
Variable:Automatically varies the sewing direction
according to the shape of the region.
Variable
Half
Stitch
To specify half stitching, select the check box.
If one side of the zigzag stitching is dense, half stitches
will be sewn automatically to provide a more even stitch
density.
This cannot be specified if the sewing direction is set to
Constant.
Off On
Running
Stitch
Path
Specify the running path of the inside region.
Inside of region (shortest route inside the shape)
Along outline (shortest route along the inside of
the shape outline)
On outline (shortest route on the outline of the
shape)
The inside of region setting is not available if the
Gradation check box is selected.
This cannot be specified under the following conditions.
• The sewing direction is set to Variable.
• Text and manual punching patterns
Inside of region
Along outline
On outline
Pull
compen-
sation
Lengthen the sewing region in the sewing direction to
adjust for pattern shrinkage during sewing.
No compensation
Longest
compensation
b Memo:
“Manually Creating Professional-Level Embroidery Patterns (Manual Punching)” on page 77.
The inside stitching is
dense.
The stitching is adjusted
to a more even density.
103
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Fill stitch
Programmable fill stitch
Under
sewing
c
“Satin stitch” on page 101.
Density
Direction
Stitch
Type
Specify the shape of the returning ends of the stitching.
This cannot be specified if the sewing direction is set to
variable.
Half Stitch
c
“Half Stitch” and “Running Stitch Path” on page 102.
Running
Stitch Path
Step pitch Specify the stitching pitch (length of one stitch).
Short Long
Frequency Specify the shift in the stitches.
0% 50%
Pull
compen-
sation
c
“Pull compensation” on page 102.
Under sewing
c
“Region sewing attributes” on page 101 and 102.
Density
Direction
Half Stitch
Running Stitch Path
Pull compensation
104
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Programmable fill
Select a pattern for the programmable fill stitch.
Click to display the Browse dialog box. Select a folder, and then select the desired
pattern (.pas file) from the list of patterns that appears.
Specify the pattern size. The pattern can
be enlarged or reduced while maintaining
the width-to-height proportion.
Smaller Larger
1 Height
(vertical
length)
Specify the pattern
height.
Short
Tal l
2 Width
(horizontal
length)
Specify the pattern
width.
Short
Long
Direction
Drag or select a value to specify the
angle of the pattern.
Offset
row
Specify the offset (shift) direction of the
pattern alignment.
0%
column
Specify the offset (shift) amount of the
pattern alignment.
Row 50% Column 50%
Base Sewing
To specify base stitching, select the check box, and then specify settings for the following
attributes.
Stitch Type
Specify the shape of the returning ends
of the stitching.
This cannot be specified if the sewing
direction is set to variable.
Step Pitch
Specify the stitching pitch (length of one
stitch).
Short
Long
Frequency Specify the shift in the stitches.
0% 50%
1
2
0°
45°
90°
135°
180°
225°
270°
315°
Area where the embossing
or engraving effects are
applied
This area is sewn with the stitching settings
specified for the base sewing of the
programmable fill stitch.
This area is sewn with the stitching settings
specified by the pattern file.
Pattern
105
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Piping stitch
Stitching is created to run through the length of blocks.
Direction
Specify the sewing angle.
Drag or select a value to specify the
angle.
This cannot be specified for manual
punching patterns.
Specify settings for the following if the motif stitch pattern is not used.
Density
Specify the number of threads per
millimeter.
Coarse Fine
Run pitch Specify the run pitch of the lines.
Short Long
Frequency Specify the shift in the stitches.
0% 50%
Use Motif
To use a motif stitch in the pattern, select the check box, and then specify settings for
the following attributes.
Motif
c
“Motif stitch” in the “Region sewing attributes” on page 106.
Pattern1/Pattern2
c
“Motif stitch” in the “Line sewing attributes” on page 99.
Type and size of the
motif stitch patterns
H-Arrange
V-Arrange
H-Spacing
V-Spacing
c
“Motif stitch” in the “Region sewing attributes” on page 106.
Row offset
Run pitch
0°
45°
90°
135°
180°
225°
270°
315°
106
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Motif stitch
Motif
Select the pattern to be used for the motif stitch.
Pattern1 only: Only pattern 1 is used.
Pattern2 only: Only pattern 2 is used.
Pattern1 and 2: Patterns 1 and 2 are used to sew
alternating rows of each pattern.
Pattern1 only
Pattern2 only
Pattern1 and 2
Pattern1/Pattern2 Specify settings for each pattern.
Type and size of the
motif stitch patterns
c
“Motif stitch” in the “Line sewing attributes” on page 99.
H-Arrange
V-Arrange
H-Spacing
(horizontal spacing)
V-Spacing
(vertical spacing)
Specify the vertical spacing of the
patterns.
Narrow Wide
Direction
Drag or select a value to specify the
angle.
Row offset
Specify the offset (shift) amount of the
pattern alignment.
Smaller Larger
Run pitch
c
“Motif stitch” in the “Line sewing attributes” on page 99.
0°
45°
90°
135°
180°
225°
270°
315°
107
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Cross stitch
Concentric circle stitch, radial stitch and spiral stitch
For details on moving the center point of the concentric circle stitch and the radial stitch, refer to “Moving the
center point” on page 61.
Size
Specify the horizontal and vertical size of the grid
pattern.
In Expert mode, specify the value in millimeters or
counts. If the value is specified in only one of the
measurement units, it is automatically converted
and displayed in the other measurement units.
Smaller Larger
Times
Select Single, Double or Triple as the number of
times that the pattern is sewn. Sews twice per time.
Single Triple
Density
Specify the stitch density as the number of threads
per millimeter.
Concentric Circle
Stitch Coarse
Radial Stitch Coarse
Spiral Stitch Coarse
Concentric Circle
Stitch Fine
Radial Stitch Fine
Spiral Stitch Fine
Run pitch Specify the run pitch (length of one stitch).
Short Long
108
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Stippling stitch
Manual punch
If Satin Stitch, Fill Stitch or Prog. Fill Stitch is selected as the region sew type for the manual punching pattern,
feathered edge settings can be specified.
Run pitch
Specify the run pitch (length of one stitch).
This cannot be specified if the motif stitch is
used.
Short
The turns are
smoother.
Long
The turns are more
angled.
Spacing
Specify the spacing between adjacent
stitches.
Narrow
The pattern is finer.
Wide
The pattern is coarser.
Use Motif
To use a motif stitch in the pattern, select the check box, and then specify settings for the
following attributes.
Type and size of the
motif stitch patterns
c
“Motif stitch” in the “Line sewing attributes” on page 99.
H-Arrange
V-Arrange
Spacing
Run pitch
Feathered
edge
Specify the edge of the stitching
where the feathered edge is to be
applied.
When the check box is selected, a
feathered edge is applied to the
embroidery pattern in the Design
Page. Check the preview, and
then select the edge where the
feathered edge is to be applied.
Select a pattern for the feathered edge.
Click to display the Browse dialog box. Select the desired
pattern from the list of patterns that appears.
Top side of pattern
For <pattern11>
Bottom side of
pattern
For <pattern18>
Top edge only
Bottom edge only
Top and bottom
edges
Specify the width of the feathered edge
Short Long
Feathered edge settings not specified
Feathered edge settings specified
109
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
■ Region sewing attributes
Notes on programmable fill stitches and
stamps
When setting the sew type and pattern directions of
a programmable fill stitch or a stamp, lines will not
be sewn if the sew type and pattern direction
settings cause a stitch to be sewn in the same
direction as a line in the stitch pattern.
Use the Preview function to view exactly how the
stitch pattern will be sewn, and then set the stitch
direction and pattern direction according to the
selected sew type or to the effect that you want to
produce. To get an even better view, make test
samples of different settings.
Examples of programmable fill stitching:
c
“Displaying a preview of the embroidery”
on page 65 and on “Creating Custom
Stitch Patterns (Programmable Stitch
Creator)” on page 205 in the Instruction
Manual (PDF format).
Saving frequently used
sewing attributes
Frequently used sewing attributes can be saved
together, and recalled when specifying sewing
attributes.
■ Saving the settings in a list
1. Open the Sewing Attribute Setting dialog
box.
c
“Specifying sewing attributes” on
page 96.
2. If necessary, change the settings in the
Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box, and
then click .
3. Click Save As.
4. Type in a name for the group of settings, and
then click OK to register the group in a list.
Example 1
Stitch direction: 45° (default)
Example 2
Stitch direction: 90°
Example 3
Stitch direction: 0°
b Memo:
Settings in both
Beginner mode
and
Expert
mode
can be saved.
110
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
■ Deleting a group of settings from
the list
1. In the Load/Save Default Settings dialog
box, select the group of settings to be deleted.
2. Click Delete to delete the selected group of
settings from the list.
■ Recalling a group of settings from
the list
1. In the Load/Save Default Settings dialog
box, select the group of settings to be recalled.
2. Click Load.
→ The settings in the Sewing Attribute
Setting dialog box change to the saved
settings.
Editing user thread color
lists
User thread charts can be created and edited to
contain a list of threads that are used most often or
a list of all threads that you have. Thread data from
system thread charts can be included or new thread
data can be added.
1. Click Option, then Edit User Thread Chart.
■ Creating a new thread chart
1. Click New Chart.
2. Type in the name of the chart, and then click
OK to save the chart with the entered name.
b Memo:
(default) cannot be deleted.
b Memo:
• To change the saved settings and save the
changes, change the settings in the
Sewing
Attribute Setting
dialog box, click ,
then click
Save As
, and then click
OK
without changing the group name for the
settings.
• The saved setting can also be used on a
different computer. Simply copy
sastu.txt
from the
Settings
folder in the
PE-DESIGN
8
folder (program folder) on the original
computer to the
Settings
folder at the same
path on the destination computer.
b Memo:
A saved chart can be selected from the
User
Thread Chart
selector, then edited.
111
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
■ Deleting a chart
1. From the User Thread Chart selector, select
the chart.
2. Click Delete Chart.
→ The following message appears.
3. Click Yes to delete the selected chart.
■ Editing a chart
1. From the User Thread Chart selector, select
the chart.
■ Adding an item from a thread
chart
1. From the Thread Chart selector, select the
brand of thread.
2. From the list at the bottom of the dialog box,
click the thread colors.
3. Click .
→ The selected items are added to the list in
the user thread chart.
a Note:
If no chart is selected, the editing operation
cannot be performed.
b Memo:
To add multiple items, hold down the
or keys while selecting thread colors.
Shift
Ctrl
112
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
■ Adding a new item
1. Click New Item.
2. To create a new color, click Mix.
→ A dialog box similar appears.
3. Specify the color, and then click OK to add the
specified color to the Edit Thread dialog box.
4. If necessary, type in the code, brand and
description into the appropriate boxes.
5. Click OK to add the new item to the user
thread chart.
■ Deleting an item
From the list for the user thread chart, select the
item to be deleted, and then click Delete Item to
delete the item from the user thread chart.
b Memo:
Only numbers can be entered for the code.
b Memo:
An asterisk (*) appears in front of the index
number for items created or edited by the
user.
113
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
■ Editing an item
An item registered in the list for a user thread chart
can be edited to change the color or thread number.
1. From the list for the user thread chart, select
the item to be edited, and then click Edit Item.
→ The following dialog box appears.
2. Edit the item details in the same way as
adding an item.
■ Changing the order of items
From the list for the user thread chart, select the
item to be moved, and then click Up or Down to
change the order of the item.
b Memo:
As with newly added items, an asterisk (*)
appears in front of the index number of edited
items.
a Note:
Thread colors in embroidery patterns
created with this application may appear
differently on the embroidering machine.
1. Embroidery machines without a function
for displaying thread color information
The specified thread information cannot be
displayed on some machines.
2. Embroidery machines with a function for
displaying thread colors
Of the thread information specified in the
embroidery pattern, only the thread colors
are displayed on the machine. However, the
thread color names that are displayed are
limited to the machine’s preset thread color
names. Therefore, use thread color names
in the embroidery pattern that are closest to
the machine’s preset thread color names.
3. Machines with a thread color index
Some machines can display the thread
information (such as the color, the color
name as well as the brand name and thread
number) specified with this application. The
machines can display the color, the color
name as well as the brand name and thread
number.
However, for items edited or added by the
user (items marked with an asterisk (*)), only
the thread number is displayed.
b Memo:
The edited user thread chart can also be used
on a different computer. Simply copy
chart2.btc
from the
Color
folder in the
PE-
DESIGN 8
folder (application folder) on the
original computer to the
Color
folder at the
same path on the destination computer.
114
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Editing Regions
Applying and editing
Stamps
Stamps can be applied to regions of objects drawn
with the Rectangle, Circle or Arc tools, Shape tools,
Outline tools, Text tools and the Manual Punch tools
and that have the satin stitch, fill stitch and
programmable fill stitch applied. Some stamp
patterns are provided with this application.
■ Applying a stamp
1. Click on the Tool Box.
→ Two buttons appear: .
2. Click .
3. In the dialog box, select a stamp pattern (.pas
file with stamp settings applied).
4. To change the width and height of the stamp,
type the desired size into Size in the Stamp
Attribute Setting dialog box.
5. To change the orientation of the stamp, move
the pointer over the red arrow inside of the
circle under Direction, and then drag the red
arrow to the desired angle.
6. Click the object to select it.
→ “Marching lines” appear around the
selected object.
7. Click the desired locations within the object.
→ The stamps appear as dotted lines in the
object.
b Memo:
Using Programmable Stitch Creator, you can
edit patterns that have been provided or you
can create your own.
c
“Creating Custom Stitch Patterns
(Programmable Stitch Creator)”
on page 205.
b Memo:
• Engraving and embossing stamp settings
appear as red- and blue-filled areas.
• To select a different folder, click .
b Memo:
• The dialog box remains displayed so that
the size and orientation of the stamp can be
adjusted at any time.
• To open the dialog box again after closing it,
click .
b Memo:
• The whole stamp appears, even if it is larger
than the object that it has been applied to,
however, only the parts that are enclosed
within the object will be sewn.
• To apply several stamps within the same
object, continue clicking the object as often
as needed.
• If the pointer cannot fit within the selected
object, the stamp cannot be applied.
•The
Stamp Attribute Setting
dialog box
appears only after a stamp tool is selected.
115
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
■ Editing a stamp
1. Click on the Tool Box.
→ Two buttons appear: .
2. Click .
→ Stamps that have been applied are
indicated by pink dotted lines.
3. Click the object with the stamp.
→ “Marching lines” appear around the
selected object.
4. Click the stamp.
→ Round handles appear around the stamp,
and a rotation handle appears at the top of
the stamp.
5. Editing the stamp.
• To change the stamp pattern, select a
different pattern in the Stamp Attribute
Setting dialog box, and then click Apply.
• To change the stamp size and orientation,
specify the desired settings in the Stamp
Attribute Setting dialog, or adjust it by
dragging the handles or rotation handle.
• To move a stamp, drag it to another
location within the object or partially
positioned on the object.
• To delete the stamp, select the menu
command Edit – Delete, or press the
key.
Creating a gradation/
blending
The density of one or two colors can be adjusted at
various locations to create a custom gradation
pattern.
1. In Expert mode of the Sewing Attribute
Setting dialog box, select the Gradation
check box under Region sew.
2. Click Pattern.
3. To change the thread color, click . Select
a color in the Thread Color dialog box that
appeared, and then click OK.
4. To select a preset gradation pattern, click the
desired pattern under Select pattern.
a Note:
Only one stamp can be selected at a time. If
you select another stamp, the previously
selected stamp becomes deselected.
Rotation handle
Scale
handles
b Memo:
• When an object with a stamp applied is
moved or rotated, the stamp is also moved
or rotated. However, if the size of an object
is changed, the size of the stamp does not
change.
• Stamps are only sewn within the region that
they have been applied to.
Delete
116
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
5. Move the sliders to adjust the density of the
gradation pattern.
6. To blend two colors, select the Use additional
color check box, click under Use
additional color. Select a color in the Thread
Color dialog box that appeared, and then click
OK.
7. Click OK.
c
“Color” on page 95.
b Memo:
The preview area shows the setting changes
that you make.
b Memo:
• If the
Use additional color
check box is
cleared, the gradation settings are applied
to the remaining color.
• The first and second colors of the gradation
can also be changed by selecting
Region1
or
Region2
in the
Thread Color
dialog box.
117
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Checking and Editing the Sewing Order/
Lock
The sewing order of an embroidery pattern can be viewed or changed. In addition, from the same dialog box,
the color and sew type for each color can be changed, or the embroidery pattern can be locked.
Toolbar button:
1. Click , or click Sew, then Sewing
Order/Lock.
:Click to enlarge each pattern to fill its
frame.
:Click to display in one frame all patterns
of the same color that will be sewn
together.
Selecting a pattern
1. Select a pattern in the Sewing Order/Lock
dialog box.
→ The selected pattern has a blue line
around it, and “marching lines” appear
around the corresponding pattern in the
Design Page.
b Memo:
• When multiple patterns are combined into
one frame, appears to the left of the
number of that frame.
Click to display the combined patterns
in separate frames.
appears under the first frame, and
each frame is displayed with a subnumber
following the first, to indicate its sewing
order within the patterns of the same color.
Click
to recombine all of the patterns
back into one frame.
• To close the
Sewing Order
/
Lock
dialog
box, click in the upper-right corner of the
dialog box.
b Memo:
• To select multiple patterns, hold down the
or key while clicking the
frames for the desired patterns. In addition,
multiple frames can be selected by
dragging the pointer over them.
Shift
Ctrl
118
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Editing the sewing order
The sewing order can be changed by selecting the
frame containing the pattern, then dragging the
frame to the new location. A vertical red line
appears, indicating the position where the frame is
being moved.
An alternative method for moving the frames is by
clicking the buttons at the top of the dialog box.
:Click to move the selected pattern to the
beginning of the sewing order.
:Click to move the selected pattern ahead
one position in the sewing order.
:Click to move the selected pattern back
one position in the sewing order.
:Click to move the selected pattern to the
end of the sewing order.
■ Combining patterns of the same
color
When a Design Page contains a combination of
patterns, those patterns with the same color can
be grouped together from the Sewing Order/
Lock dialog box. Simply drag the frame of the
patterns with the same color to position them
beside each other.
Changing colors
The color of the objects for each color can be
changed. The thread colors can also be changed in
stitch patterns. The procedure for changing colors in
an embroidery pattern is described below.
c
“Memo” on page 49.
1. Select a pattern in the Sewing Order/Lock
dialog box.
2. Click on Sewing Attributes bar.
c
“Layout & Editing Window” on page 47.
3. Click the desired color.
→ The object appears in the new color in the
Sewing Order/Lock dialog box and in the
Design Page.
c
“Color” on page 95.
b Memo:
Check the stitching after changing the sewing
order to be sure that overlapping patterns will
not be sewn in the wrong order.
119
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Changing sewing attributes
The sew type for the objects in each color can be
changed.
1. Select a pattern in the Sewing Order/Lock
dialog box.
2. Click Sew, then Sewing Attribute Setting.
c
“Layout & Editing Window” on page 47.
→ The Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box
appears.
3. Change the sew type.
c
“Sew type” and “Specifying sewing
attributes” are on page 96.
Locking embroidery
patterns
Embroidery patterns can be locked to prevent them
from being moved or deleted. Locked embroidery
patterns cannot be selected, and editing operations.
1. Select a pattern in the Sewing Order/Lock
dialog box.
2. Click .
→ appears at the bottom of the frame.
→ The embroidery pattern is locked.
To unlock the embroidery pattern, select the
frame, and then click again.
b Memo:
• Frames with to the left of the number
contain multiple patterns of the same color.
If these frames are selected to be locked, all
patterns in the frame are locked.
• Locking either the line or region of an
embroidery pattern made up of an outline
and inside region locks the entire
embroidery pattern.
• Locking any part of a combined pattern,
such as grouped patterns, text arranged on
a curve or patterns with hole sewing
specified, locks the entire embroidery
pattern.
120
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Importing Image Data
An imported image is needed to create an embroidery pattern, a template for manual punching, or as a pattern
that can be printed onto iron-on paper.
An image can be imported using any of the following four methods.
1From a file
2 From a scanner or digital camera
3 From a portrait image
4 From the Clipboard
Importing image/photo
from a file
Different types of clip art or photos can be imported
into Layout & Editing to create embroidery patterns.
There are many different types of files that can be
imported.
c
“Image file formats” on page 19.
1. Click Image, then Input, then from File.
2. Select the drive, the folder and the desired file.
3. Click Open to open the file.
→ The image appears in the work area.
Importing image data from a
scanner or digital camera
Images can be imported into the current Design Page
from a scanner or other TWAIN device and used as a
template for creating an embroidery pattern.
1. Check that the scanner or other TWAIN device
is correctly connected to your computer.
2. Click Image, then Select TWAIN Device.
3. From the Sources list, click the desired device
to select it.
4. Click Select to choose the selected device
and to close the dialog box.
5. Click Image, then Input, then from TWAIN
device.
→ The driver interface for the device selected
in the Select Source dialog box appears.
6. Specify the necessary settings for importing
an image, and then import the image.
a Note:
Only one image can be added to the work area. If you try to display a different image, it will replace the
previous one.
b Memo:
If the
Preview
check box is selected, the
contents of the selected file will appear in the
Preview
box.
b Memo:
Various clip art images can be found in the
ClipArt
folder, which can be found in the
folder where PE-DESIGN was installed. (For
example, click the drive where PE-DESIGN
was installed, then
Program Files
, then
Brother
, then
PE-DESIGN 8
, then
ClipArt
.)
b Memo:
TWAIN is an application interface (API)
standardization for software that controls
scanners and other devices.
a Note:
If no TWAIN device is installed, there will be
no names displayed in the
Sources
list.
First, install the driver software for the
TWAIN device.
121
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
→ When the image transfer between the
scanner (or other device) and the driver is
completed, the imported image will be
pasted into the Design Page at its original
size.
Creating a portrait image
Combine images of facial features provided with the
application to create an original portrait image.
1. Click Image, then Input, then from Portrait.
2. From the Facial Feature selector, select the
overall contour (appearance) of the portrait
(for example, narrow, wide, or child-like).
3. From the Part selector, select the part of the
portrait to be changed.
4. Move the Part Variation slider to select the
desired part variation.
5. To select a part feature (for example, standard
size, slightly larger, slightly smaller, wider or
taller), move the Part Feature slider, if it is
available.
6. To change the color of the parts, click the
Color tab, click the selector for the color, and
then select the desired color from the color list
that appeared.
7. Click OK.
→ The portrait image is displayed in the
Design Page.
a Note:
For information on using the driver interface,
refer to the help manual for that interface, or
contact the manufacturer of the interface.
b Memo:
The part of the portrait to be changed can also
be selected by clicking it in the preview area.
b Memo:
• To change both sides of a part together,
such as the eyes or ears, select the
Change Both Left and Right
check box.
• To display all variations of the selected part,
click .
• To display the images of all parts
combined, select the
Display With
Other Parts
check box in the
Part
Variations List
dialog box that
appeared.
• Select a part from the list, and then
click
OK
.
122
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Importing image data from
the clipboard
Image data can be imported into the Design Page
from the Clipboard. This allows you to import an
image without saving it first.
1. Click Image, then Input, then from
Clipboard.
→ The image is displayed in the Design
Page.
a Note:
This can only be done when there is image
data on the Clipboard.
b Memo:
The image is displayed with a resolution of
100 dpi for both the height and width.
123
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Changing the Image Settings
Changing the display of the
background image
The image that remains in the work area can be
displayed or hidden, or a faded copy of the image
can be displayed.
1. Click Image, then Display Image, and then
select the desired setting.
• To display the original image, click On (100%).
• To display a faded copy of the image, click the
desired density (75%, 50% or 25%).
• To hide the original image, click Off.
Changing the size, angle
and position of the image
The size, angle and position of the image can be
adjusted.
1. Click Image, then Modify.
→ A red line and handles appear around the
image.
Moving an image:
1. Move the pointer over the image.
2. Drag the image to the desired location.
Scaling an image:
1. Move the pointer over one of the handles.
2. Drag the handle to adjust the image to the
desired size.
Rotating an image:
An image can be rotated in 90-degree increments.
1. Click Image, then Rotate. Select 90 Degrees
Clockwise or 90 Degrees
Counterclockwise.
→ The image is rotated in the specified
direction.
Deleting an image:
1. Press the key, or click Edit, then
Delete.
→ The image will be deleted from the Design
Page.
b Memo:
Press the shortcut key ( ) to switch
between displaying the image (
On (100%)
) to
displaying it faded at each density (
75%
,
50%
and
25%
) to hiding the image (
Off
).
b Memo:
The status bar shows the dimensions (width
and height) of the image.
F6
b Memo:
If the key is held down while a handle is
dragged, the image is enlarged or reduced
from the center of the image.
Shift
Delete
124
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Saving the image data
The image can be saved as a file or outputted to the
Clipboard.
■ Saving as a file
1. Click Image, then Output, then to File.
2. Select the drive, the folder and the format in
which you want to save the image data.
3. Type in the file name.
4. Click Save to save the data.
■ Outputting to the Clipboard
1. Click Image, then Output, then to Clipboard.
→ The image data in the Design Page is
copied onto the Clipboard.
b Memo:
The image data can be saved in either of the
following formats: Windows bitmap (.bmp),
Exif (.jpg).
125
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Automatically Converting an Image to an
Embroidery Pattern (Image to Stitch Wizard)
The Image to Stitch Wizard gives step-by-step instructions for converting an image into an embroidery pattern.
Toolbar button:
1. If no image is displayed in the Design Page,
use one of the commands on the Input sub-
menu of the Image menu to display the image.
c
“Importing Image Data” on page 120.
2. Click Image, then Modify, and then re-size
and re-position the image for creating the
embroidery pattern.
3. Click , or click Image, then Image to
Stitch Wizard.
→ The following dialog box appears.
1 Current image
2 Embroidery pattern after being converted
3 Type of embroidery data to be created
4 Description of the selected embroidery type
4. Select the type of embroidery, and then click
Next.
Auto Punch:
Select this option to automatically extract the
outline for creating the embroidery pattern.
(Proceed to “If Auto Punch is selected”)
Photo Stitch 1:
Select this option to automatically create a
realistic photo embroidery pattern. This option
can be used to create embroidery patterns in
color (Color), sepia or grayscale (Sepia) or
black and white (Mono).
(Proceed to “If Photo Stitch 1 (Color) is
selected”, “If Photo Stitch 1 (Sepia) is
selected” or “If Photo Stitch 1 (Mono) is
selected”)
Photo Stitch 2:
Select this option to automatically create
realistic photo embroidery in 4 colors (Color)
or 1 color (Mono).
(Proceed to “If Photo Stitch 2 (Color) is
selected” or “If Photo Stitch 2 (Mono) is
selected”)
Cross Stitch:
Select this option to create a cross stitch
pattern. This option can be used to create
embroidery patterns in color (Color), or sepia
or grayscale (Sepia).
(Proceed to “If Cross Stitch (Color) is
selected” or “If Cross Stitch (Sepia) is
selected”)
Design Center:
Select this option to start up Design Center
with the Design Page image.
(Proceed to “If Design Center is selected”)
a Note:
The dialog box will not appear if no image is
displayed in the Design Page. Instead, a
dialog box appears, allowing you to open an
image file.
3
4
1
2
b Memo:
The following types of images are appropriate
for embroidery patterns.
Auto Punch/Cross Stitch/Design Center
• Images with few and distinct colors
Photo Stitch
• Photos where the subject to be
embroidered appears clearly
• Portraits should be resized so that the
size of the face is at least 100 × 100
mm (4 × 4 inches).
• Photos that are bright and sharp
126
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Automatically converting an image to
an embroidery pattern (Auto Punch)
A tutorial describing basic operations is also
available.
c
“Auto Punch Function” on page 20
■ If Auto Punch is selected
1. Select the desired settings.
The resulting analyzed image appears in the
image preview box on the Result View tab.
The embroidery pattern will be created with
this image.
To adjust the zoom ratio that the image is
displayed in, move the slider between and
.
Use the following sliders to specify the
settings for analyzing the image.
Noise reduction: Sets the level of noise
(distortions) that is removed from the image.
Segmentation sensitivity: Sets the
sensitivity for the image analysis.
Max. Number of Colors: Sets the number of
colors used.
From the Thread Chart selector, select the
desired thread color chart. The most
appropriate thread colors from the selected
thread chart are selected. A user thread chart
can also be selected.
To display the original image, click the
Original View tab.
Check the resulting image and, if it appears as
desired, continue with step
6.
To convert regions to lines or change the
areas to be sewn, continue with step
2.
2.
To convert the regions to lines, click
Create Lines
.
3. Click the areas to be converted to lines.
4. Click OK.
→ The image with areas converted to thin
lines appears.
5. On the Result View tab, click the areas of the
image to select whether or not they are to be
sewn.
Whether or not to sew areas converted to lines
can also be selected.
b Memo:
After changing the settings, click
Retry
to
display the image with the new settings
applied. If
Retry
is not clicked, the new
settings are not applied.
b Memo:
To select all areas of a certain color to be
converted to lines, click the color under
Colors
so that × is removed.
b Memo:
Areas not set to be sewn are shown filled with
a crosshatch pattern and appear as a dotted
line are not sewn.
These areas
will not be sewn.
127
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
6. After selecting the desired settings, click
Finish.
→ An embroidery pattern is created from the
analyzed data, the appropriate thread
colors and sew type settings are applied,
and then the pattern is displayed in the
Design Page.
→ The image is automatically hidden.
Automatically converting a photo to an
embroidery pattern (Photo Stitch 1/Photo Stitch 2)
■ If Photo Stitch 1 (Color) is
selected
A tutorial describing basic operations is also
available.
c
“Photo Stitch Function” on page 24
1. From the list at the left side of the dialog box,
select the desired shape that the image will be
trimmed to (mask).
2. In the image preview box, move the handles of
the mask until it surrounds the desired part of
the image.
b Memo:
• If necessary, in the
Omit Region Colors
list
and
Omit Line Colors
list, click the colors
to select whether or not they will be sewn.
You can select whether or not areas will be
sewn by selecting their colors.
• Colors that are crossed out are set to not be
sewn.
b Memo:
The sew type settings of the created
embroidery pattern can later be changed in the
same way as the settings for other patterns.
b Memo:
• To display the
Image Tune
dialog box,
where you can adjust the image, click
Image Tune
.
• To display the image enlarged (or reduced),
move the
ZOOM
slider up (or down).
•
To create any shape of mask, select
, and then move, enter or delete
points to adjust the mask shape. To add
points, click the outline of the mask. To
delete points, select the point, and the
n
press the key
.
•If
Auto Generate
was clicked, is
selected and an outline of mask was
automatically detected from the image.
• With a single-colored background, click
Auto Generate
to automatically detect the
outline of the image. The outline can be
adjusted by moving or deleting points.
Delete
128
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Pattern edited with the round mask
Pattern edited with the adjustable mask
3. In the Select Mask dialog box, click Next.
4. Adjust the image size and position.
• Drag the image to the desired position.
• Drag the handle to adjust the image to the
desired size.
• Embroidery pattern size that will be created
can be checked in the lower left corner of
the dialog box.
5. Click Next.
6. Specify the settings for creating the
embroidery pattern.
c
“Sewing Option” and “Color Option” on
page 131.
c
For details on clicking Select from
Candidates, refer to step on page 26.
a Note:
With a small original image, it may not be
possible to reduce the size of the mask.
b Memo:
Image Tune
• Clicking the
Image Tune
button in the
Select Mask
dialog box displays an
Image
Tune
dialog box.
• Move the
Original – Sharp
slider to adjust
the sharpness of the image’s outlines. A
setting more towards
Sharp
makes a more
noticeable boundary between bright and
dark areas.
• Move the
Dark – Bright
slider to adjust the
brightness of the image.
• Move the
Low – High Contrast
slider to
adjust the contrast of the image.
b Memo:
Click
Fit to Page
to adjust the mask to the size
of the Design Page.
Embroidery
pattern
size
7
129
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
7. In the Photo Stitch 1 Parameters dialog box,
click Update Preview.
→ The previewed image is updated.
8. Click Finish.
→ An embroidery pattern is created and
displayed in the Design Page.
→ The image is automatically hidden.
■
If Photo Stitch 1 (Sepia) is selected
The basic operations for this function are the same
as those for the Photo Stitch 1 (Color) function.
1. From the list at the left side of the dialog box,
select the desired shape that the image will be
trimmed to (mask).
2. In the image preview box, move the handles of
the mask until it surrounds the desired part of
the image.
c
See step
2.
on page 127.
3. Click Sepia or Gray to select the color tone.
4. Click Next.
5. Adjust the image size and position.
c
See step
4.
on page 128.
6. Click Next.
7. Specify the settings for creating the
embroidery pattern.
c
“Sewing Option” and “Color Option” on
page 131.
8. Click Update Preview.
→ The previewed image is updated.
9. Click Finish.
→ An embroidery pattern is created and
displayed in the Design Page.
→ The image is automatically hidden.
130
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
■
If Photo Stitch 1 (Mono) is selected
The basic operations for this function are the same
as those for the Photo Stitch 1 (Color) function.
1. From the list at the left side of the dialog box,
select the desired shape that the image will be
trimmed to (mask).
2. In the image preview box, move the handles of
the mask until it surrounds the desired part of
the image
c
See step
2.
on page 127.
3. Click Next.
4. Adjust the image size and position.
c
See step
4.
on page 128.
5. Move the slider to specify which parts of the
image to create the embroidery pattern for.
6. Click Next.
7. Specify the settings for creating the
embroidery pattern.
c
“Sewing Option” and “Color Option” on
page 131.
8. Click Update Preview.
→ The previewed image is updated.
9. Click Finish.
→ An embroidery pattern is created and
displayed in the Design Page.
→ The image is automatically hidden.
131
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Sewing Option
Color Option
Detail
Specifies how detailed the created
embroidery pattern will be. Selecting a
setting closer to Fine creates more
details in the pattern and increases the
number of stitches. (The stitches will
overlap)
Run Pitch
Sets the sewing pitch. The pattern is
created with this setting value as the
minimum length. When the value is
lowered, the sewing pitch will be
shortened, resulting in finer stitching.
Sew Page
Color
(Available
only with
Color and
Sepia)
If this check box is selected, the data for
the parts of the pattern that are the
same color as the Design Page will be
created. Clear the check box to keep
the fabric the same color as the Design
Page.
Default: Selected
Conversion
Priority
Select what parameter is given priority
when converting to embroidery pattern.
Stitch Quality: Creates a pattern while
giving priority to the stitching quality.
However, many jump stitches will result.
Jump Stitch Reduction: Creates a
pattern while giving priority to reducing
the number of jump stitches in order to
reduce complications during
embroidering. However, the stitching
quality will be slightly reduced.
Image Type
If Photo is selected, the thread colors
will be mixed together, which will result
in a more natural look.
If Cartoon is selected, the thread colors
will not be mixed together, which will
result in a more simply colored look.
Select Photo for image data from a
photograph, etc. Select Cartoon for
image data from an illustration, etc.
Color/Sepia
Auto Select
Select this check box to automatically
select the thread colors.
As a default, this check box is selected.
If this check box is cleared, select the
thread colors manually.
Manual
Select
Appears when the Auto Select check
box is cleared.
Click this button to open the Manual
Select dialog box, which lets you
manually set the thread colors to be
used when creating the pattern (see
below).
Thread Chart
Selects the thread chart for selecting
the thread color with the Auto Select
function.
The most appropriate thread colors
from the selected thread chart are
selected.
A user thread chart can also be
selected.
Max. Number
of Colors
Sets the number of colors selected by
the Auto Select function.
Mono
Change
Color
Click on the Change Color button to
open the Thread Color dialog box if you
wish to change the color of the photo
stitching. You can also change the
brand of thread you wish to sew with.
Select the color and click OK to make
the color change.
Color/Sepia/Mono
Brightness /
Contrast
The top slider is used to adjust the
brightness. Move the slider to the right
to increase the brightness or to the left
to decrease the brightness. The bottom
slider is used to adjust the contrast.
Move the slider to the right to increase
the contrast or to the left to decrease
the contrast. Click on Update Preview
to see changes made.
Select from
Candidates
Click this button to open the Select
from Candidates dialog box. Variations
of the image with different degrees of
brightness and contrast are displayed.
Click one of the variations, and then
click OK to apply the settings and
display a preview of the image.
Update
Preview
Click this button to update the
previewed image after settings have
been changed.
132
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
■ If Photo Stitch 2 (Color) is
selected
1. From the list at the left side of the dialog box,
select the desired shape that the image will be
trimmed to (mask).
2. In the image preview box, move the handles of
the mask until it surrounds the desired part of
the image.
c
See step
2.
on page 127.
3. Click Next.
4. Adjust the image size and position.
c
See step
4.
on page 128.
5. Click Next.
6. Specify the settings for creating the
embroidery pattern.
c
“Sewing Option” on page 133 and “Color
Option” on page 134.
7. Click Update Preview.
→ The previewed image is updated.
8. Click Finish.
→ An embroidery pattern is created and
displayed in the Design Page.
→ The image is automatically hidden.
b Memo:
About the
Manual Select
dialog box
• To move the color selected in the
Color List
to the
Use Color List
, click
Add
.
• To delete the color selected in the
Use
Color List
, click
Remove
.
• The thread colors in the
Color List
and
Use
Color List
are listed, in order, starting from
the brightest. This order is the sewing order
and cannot be changed.
• The maximum number of colors that can be
added to the
Use Color List
is 50.
• Thread colors displayed in the
Use Color
List
are not displayed in the
Color List
.
• To select several colors, hold the
key (to select adjacent colors) or the
key (to select colors that are not adjacent),
and then select the desired colors.
Shift
Ctrl
133
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
■
If Photo Stitch 2 (Mono) is selected
1. From the list at the left side of the dialog box,
select the desired shape that the image will be
trimmed to (mask).
2. In the image preview box, move the handles of
the mask until it surrounds the desired part of
the image.
c
See step
2.
on page 127.
3. Click Next.
4. Adjust the image size and position.
c
See step
4.
on page 128.
5. Move the slider to specify which parts of the
image to create the embroidery pattern for.
6. Click Next.
7. Specify the settings for creating the
embroidery pattern.
c
“Sewing Option” on page 133 and “Color
Option” on page 134.
8. Click Update Preview.
→ The previewed image is updated.
9. Click Finish.
→ An embroidery pattern is created and
displayed in the Design Page.
→ The image is automatically hidden.
Sewing Option
Line interval
Specifies the interval between parallel
lines used to create the embroidery
pattern.
Max. Density
Specifies the maximum density for
areas of the created embroidery pattern
sewn with the zigzag stitch. The
embroidery pattern will be created with
a density smaller than that set here.
Line interval
134
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Color Option
Automatically converting an image to
a cross stitch pattern (Cross Stitch)
A tutorial describing basic operations is also
available.
c
“Cross Stitch Function” on page 27
■ If Cross Stitch (Color) is selected
1. In the image in the dialog box, click the areas
to select whether or not they are to be sewn.
2.
If necessary, in the
Omit Colors
list, click the
colors to select whether or not they will be sewn.
Color
Thread Chart
You can select the brand of thread to
use with the Color Set function. The
colors will be selected automatically
correspond with the Color Set selection.
A user thread chart can also be
selected.
Color Set
If Auto Select is selected, the most
appropriate four colors will automatically
be selected. Selecting a different option
specifies the four colors used when
creating the embroidery pattern.
The color choices are: cyan (C),
magenta (M), yellow (Y), black (K), red
(R), green (G) and blue (B). Select one
of the following combinations that
contains the colors most used in the
image.
Color combinations: CMYK, RGBK,
CRYK, BMYK
Thread
Colors Used
Displays the four selected thread colors.
Change
Color
In
Thread Colors Used
click on the
color. Then click on
Change Color
to
open the
Thread Color
dialog box.
Select the new color and click
OK
. You
will see the color change within the photo
in the preview box within the
Photo
Stitch 2 Parameters
dialog.
Mono
Change
Color
Click on the Change Color button to
open the Thread Color dialog box if you
wish to change the color of the photo
stitching. You can also change the
brand of thread you wish to sew with.
Select the color and click
OK
to make
the color change.
Color/Mono
Brightness /
Contrast
The top slider is used to adjust the
brightness. Move the slider to the right
to increase the brightness or to the left
to decrease the brightness. The bottom
slider is used to adjust the contrast.
Move the slider to the right to increase
the contrast or to the left to decrease
the contrast. Click on Update Preview
to see the changes made.
Update
Preview
Click this button to update the
previewed image after settings have
been changed.
b Memo:
• Areas not set to be sewn are shown filled
with a crosshatch pattern.
• To adjust the zoom ratio that the image is
displayed in, move the slider between
and .
These areas
will not be sewn.
135
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
3. Specify the settings for creating the
embroidery pattern.
4. Click Next.
→ The Edit Cross Stitch dialog box appears.
5. If necessary, edit the stitches.
1) Selecting stitches to be added/deleted
(cross-stitches): Specifies a cross-
stitch inside a box.
(backstitches): Specifies a back stitch
inside ( or ) or on the edge (
or ) of a box.
2) Selecting the thread color to be specified
The currently selected color appears below
Color Option.
To change the color, click Change Color to
display the Thread Color dialog box, and
then click the desired color.
To select the color to be used for a stitch,
click , and then click the stitch to be
sewn with that color.
3) Clicking/dragging to add/delete stitches
♦ For cross-stitches
Clicking a box: Adds one stitch.
♦ For backstitches
Clicking an edge of a box: Adds one
stitch at the edge.
Clicking a diagonal line in a box: Adds
one stitch on the diagonal.
♦ For both cross-stitches and backstitches
Dragging the pointer: Adds consecutive
stitches.
Right-clicking/dragging with the right
mouse button held down: Deletes one
stitch/deletes consecutive stitches.
6. Under Cross Stitch Times and Backstitch
Times, specify the number of times each
stitch is sewn.
Select Single, Double or Triple.
7. After selecting the desired settings, click
Finish.
→ The cross stitch pattern is created and
displayed in the Design Page.
→ The image is automatically hidden.
b Memo:
Colors that are crossed out are set to not be
sewn.
Cross size
Sets the horizontal and vertical size of
the pattern.
Thread Chart
You can select the brand of thread to
use in the created cross stitch pattern. A
user thread chart can also be selected.
The best corresponding thread colors
from the selected thread chart will be
selected.
Max.
Number of
Colors
Sets the number of colors used in the
created pattern.
The embroidery pattern is created using
no more than the number of colors
specified.
To view the results of the changes, click
Retry.
a Note:
If
Previous
is clicked to return to the
previous dialog box after the stitches have
been edited, the edited stitches are reset to
their previous arrangement.
b Memo:
• To display the image enlarged (or reduced),
move the
ZOOM
slider up (or down).
• To display the template, click
Display
Template
.
136
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
■ If Cross Stitch (Sepia) is selected
1. Adjust the brightness and contrast of the
image.
The top slider is used to adjust the brightness.
Move the slider to the right to increase the
brightness or to the left to decrease the
brightness. The bottom slider is used to adjust
the contrast. Move the slider to the right to
increase the contrast or to the left to decrease
the contrast.
2. Click Sepia or Gray to select the color tone.
3. Click Next.
4. Specify the sewing attributes and the settings
for creating the embroidery pattern.
5. Click Next.
6. If necessary, edit the stitches.
7. Specify the number of times each stitch is
sewn.
8. After selecting the desired settings, click
Finish.
→ The cross stitch pattern is created and
displayed in the Design Page.
The operations described starting with step 4
are the same as those starting with step 1
when Cross Stitch (Color) is selected.
c
“If Cross Stitch (Color) is selected” on
page 134.
Manually create embroidery patterns
from images (Design Center)
■ If Design Center is selected
→ Design Center starts up, and a Design
Page is displayed with the image
imported into it.
c
“Manually Creating Embroidery Patterns
From Images (Design Center)” on
page 153.
137
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Creating appliqués
(Applique Wizard)
The Applique Wizard provides instructions for easily
creating appliqués.
A tutorial describing basic operations is also available.
c
“Creating Appliqués” on page 174 in the
Instruction Manual (PDF format).
1. Select a pattern with a closed shape, such as
a circle or square.
2. Click Sew, then Applique Wizard.
3. Under Applique Material, select whether
(Yes) or not (No) the outline of the appliqué is
to be sewn onto the appliqué fabric as a guide
for cutting it out.
4. The Applique Position, (guideline for
attaching the appliqué piece) is set to be sewn
automatically.
5. Under Tack down, select whether (Yes) or
not (No) the appliqué is to be basted onto the
base fabric. If Yes is selected, select the
basting stitch from the selector. You can also
select which stitch (Satin Stitch, E Stitch or V
Stitch) to use for the basting.
6. Under Covering Stitch, select the sew type
and other attributes for finishing the appliqué.
7. Click OK to finish the Applique Wizard and
display the design in the Design Page.
Checking embroidery
design information
Sewing information such as dimensions, needle
count, sewing time, color count and color order of
patterns can be checked in the Design Property
dialog box.
1. Click Option, then Design Property.
b Memo:
• A pattern with lines that cross over
themselves cannot be selected.
• The pattern selected for creating the
appliqué will be deleted after the Applique
Wizard is used.
Satin Stitch
E Stitch
V Stitch
a Note:
The displayed sewing time is an estimate.
The actual sewing time depends on the
machine model used and the specified
settings.
b Memo:
• You can select and check the properties of
individual objects within the embroidery
pattern by selecting the pattern before
opening this dialog box.
• To display the colors as the machine’s
preset color names, select the
with Basic
Color
check box.
• If the Design Page was set to
Custom Size
or
Hoop Size
is multi-position hoop (100 x
172 mm, 130 x 300 mm), and no object in
the Design Page is selected, the sewing
information for the entire Design Page is
displayed hoop by hoop, and a
Design
Property
dialog box appears.
138
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Saving and Printing
Saving
■ Overwriting
Once the image or design has been saved, changes
can easily be saved so that the latest version can be
retrieved later.
Toolbar button:
1. Click , or click File, then Save.
→ If the image or design has already been
saved at least once, the file is saved.
→ If no file name has been specified or if the
file cannot be found, the Save As dialog
box appears.
■ Saving with a new name
The current file can be saved with a different file
name in order to keep the original unchanged or to
keep various versions of the same image or design.
The files are saved as .pes files.
1. Click File, then Save As.
2. Select the drive and the folder, and then type
in the file name.
3. Click Save to save the data.
→ The new file name appears in the title bar
of the Layout & Editing window.
■ Outputting design in a different
format
The data shown in the Design Page can be exported
as a file of a different format (.dst, .hus, .exp, .pcs,
.vip, .sew, .jef, .csd, .xxx, and .shv).
1. Click File, then Export.
2. Select the drive and the folder, and then type
in the file name.
3. Select a format (.dst, .hus, .exp, .pcs, .vip,
.sew, .jef, .csd, .xxx, or .shv) that the file can
be exported as.
a Note:
If you select a file type of a previous software
version, saved .pes files can be opened with
that version of the software; however, all
saved design will be converted to stitch
pattern.
b Memo:
With the DST format, you can specify whether
or not the jump stitches are cut according to
the number of jump codes. Since the number
of codes differ depending on the embroidery
machine being used, type or select the
appropriate value in the
Number of jumps for
trim
box. (This setting can only be specified if
the .dst format is selected.)
a Note:
• Some patterns imported from embroidery
cards cannot be exported.
• Patterns designed on a custom-sized
Design Page will be exported as a simple
file, and will not be split into sections.
139
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
■ Writing an embroidery design to
an original card
You can save a displayed embroidery design onto
an original card in order to transfer it to a embroidery
machine.
Toolbar button:
1. Insert an original card into the USB card writer
module.
c
“Transferring the design to an original
card” on page 17.
2. Click , or click File, then Write to Card.
→ The following message appears.
b Memo:
For details on writing two or more files to an
original card, refer to “Writing Embroidery
Design Files to an Original Card” on page 194
in the Instruction Manual (PDF format).
a Note:
Be sure that the hoop size of the design does
not exceed the hoop that will be used on the
embroidering machine.
a Note:
When writing to an original card that already
contains data, all data on the card will be
deleted. Before writing to a card, save all
necessary data to a hard disk or other
media, and check that no necessary data
remains on the card.
c
“From an embroidery card” on
page 49.
b Memo:
Designs created on a custom-sized Design Page
are written to cards split into their various
sections.
If the total size of the design exceeds the capacity
of the original card or if your Design Page is set to
a custom size of 90
×
90 cm (35.4”
×
35.4”), and
is split into over 80 sections, you will need to split
the design into sections and write them onto
several original cards.
In this case, the
Select Hoop Sections
dialog
box appears to let you select the sections that can
be written in the available space on the card.
The progress bar at the top of the dialog box
shows the available space on the card as you
select design sections to be written to the card.
The space used by the selected design sections
appears in blue. If you select several pattern
sections which exceed the size limit, the space
used appears in red.
Click each design section to select it, and then
click
Write
to write the selected design
sections to the card. To deselect a design
section, simply click it again. (The
Write
button is available only when a section is
selected and the space on the card is
sufficient to receive the selected design.)
140
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
3. Click OK.
→ The message “Now transmitting” appears
while the current embroidery design is
transferred to the original card, and then
the following message appears.
4. Click OK to close the message.
c
“Overwriting” on page 138 and “Saving
with a new name” on page 138.
■ Adding comments to saved .pes
files
You can enter comments and information about the
pattern to a saved .pes file.
1. Click File, then Property.
→ The File property dialog box appears.
2. To enter or change the information, type it in.
3. Click OK to save the entered information.
Specifying the sewing area
The sewing area can be specified.
1. Click Sew, then Select Sewing Area.
2. Select the desired sewing area (Design Page
area or Use existing design area).
3. Click OK.
→ If Design Page area was selected, the
patterns will be sewn so that the needle
position when you start sewing is aligned
with the center of your Design Page.
→ If Use existing design area was selected,
the patterns will be sewn so that the needle
position when you start sewing is aligned
with the center of the actual patterns.
b Memo:
• The entered information will be saved to the
file the next time that it is saved.
• Files can be searched for in Design
Database according to the entered
information.
b Memo:
When
Design Page area
is selected, the
dimension of the pattern matches the size of
the Design Page, therefore reducing the
ability to move a pattern around the layout
screen of your embroidering machine.
b Memo:
When
Use existing design area
is selected,
the actual pattern size is maintained, therefore
allowing greater mobility when using the layout
functions of your embroidering machine.
141
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
c
“Specifying the Design Page Size and
Color” on page 68.
Printing
For details on printing when combining print and
embroidery, also refer to the tutorial.
c
“6. Print and Stitch” on page 42.
■ Specifying print settings
Before printing, you may need to change the print
settings for the embroidery design files.
1. Click File, then Print Setup.
2. Under Paper and Orientation, select the
appropriate settings.
3. To print the embroidery pattern, select
Embroidery print mode.
Under Print type, Print option and Stitch
image, select how the data is to be printed.
Print type
Actual Size: Select this option to print the
design in actual size and the sewing
information (dimensions of the embroidery,
the sewing color order and the stitch count, the
hoop position) on separate pages.
Reduced Size: Select this option to print a
reduced image together with all of the above-
mentioned information on a single page.
Design Page (on your screen)
Sewing area = Design Page area
Sewing area = Use existing design area
142
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Print option
Print image: Select this check box to print the
image imported into the Design Page in
addition to the embroidery pattern. However,
any part of the image extending out of the print
area for the embroidery will not be printed.
Print sewing area box & center axes: Select
this check box to print black lines to indicate
the sewing area (refer to “Specifying the
sewing area” on page 140) and the center
axes for the data. (This setting is only
available when Actual Size is selected.)
Print template grid:
Select this check box to
print green lines to represent the grid printed on
the embroidery sheet included with the hoop.
Print hoop section boundaries onto the
first page: Select this check box to print the
design sections of a design for which the
Design Page has been set to a custom size or
to a multi-position hoop. The pattern sections
are printed in red.
Divide embroidery image into 2 pages:
Select this check box to print in actual size and
on A4- or Letter-size paper design that is
larger than the paper size by dividing them in
two and printing each half on different pages.
(This setting is only available when Actual
size is selected in the Print Setup dialog box
and when the Design Page is set to the larger
hoop sizes [300 × 200 mm (11 3/4" × 7 3/4"),
200 × 300 mm (7 3/4" × 11 3/4"), 180 × 300
mm (7" × 11 3/4") when set to Hoop Size, and
170 × 290 mm (180 × 300 mm) 6.69" × 11.41"
(7" × 11 3/4") or 290 × 190 mm (300 × 200 mm)
11.41" × 7.48" (11 3/4" × 7 3/4") when set to
Custom Size].) With this split printing feature,
/ or / is printed in the lower-
right corner of the paper to indicate which half
is printed.
Stitch image
Normal: Select this option to print the design
as lines and dots.
Realistic: Select this option to print a realistic
image of the design. To change the settings of
the realistic image, click Attributes.
c
“Memo” on page 65.
4. When printing an imported image onto iron-on
paper or printable fabric, or when printing the
sheet for positioning the embroidery in the
printed image, select the Image print mode
check box, and then select an option under
Material.
Material
Print the image on printable fablic or an
iron-on transfer sheet: Select this option to
print the background image on iron-on
material or fabric that can be printed on. Only
the image is printed.
Print a flipped image: Select this option to
print the image flipped on a vertical axis. When
printing on iron-on paper, the image is
normally printed flipped (mirror image). (For
details, refer to the instructions for the iron-on
paper that you are using.)
Select this option if your printer does not have
a function for printing a flipped (mirror) image.
(For details, refer to the instructions for your
printer.)
Print a sheet of paper for aligning the
printed image and the embroidery: Select
this option to print a sheet for aligning the
positions of the image and embroidery.
Positioning marks and guidelines indicating
the embroidering area are printed on the
image.
Change Position: The position where the
image is printed on the paper can be changed.
(Any part of the image extending out of the
print area of the paper is not printed.) Click
Change Position to display the Image Print
Position Setting dialog box, and then drag
the image to the desired printing position in the
paper.
5. Click OK.
c
“Displaying a preview of the embroidery”
on page 65.
a Note:
If the
Divide embroidery image into 2 pages
check box is cleared and you print on a larger
paper size, the design does not print in two
halves. Likewise, if you print on a smaller
paper size, the design might be cut off.
143
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
■ Checking the print image
You can preview the contents of the Design Page
before printing.
1. Click File, then Print Preview.
→ The print image is displayed.
c
“Specifying print settings” on page 141,
“Printing” on page 143 and “Checking
embroidery design information” on
page 137.
■ Printing
You can print the Design Page together with its
sewing information.
1. Click File, then Print.
2. Select the necessary settings.
3. Click OK to begin printing.
4. Follow the instructions for the printer to finish
printing.
144
Arranging Embroidery Designs (Layout & Editing)
145
Basic Design Center Operations
Basic Design Center Operations
Creating an Embroidery Design From an
Image
Design Center is used to create an embroidery design from an image. During this procedure, the image design
can be modified, the outlines and regions can be edited in detail, and sewing attributes can be specified.
The most appropriate images to use are those with few and distinct colors. Images or photos that are intricate
or have gradations are not suitable since it is difficult to extract their outlines.
An embroidery design is created in the following four stages.
This section describes the basic operations performed in Design Center. For details on the procedures or
settings, refer to “Manually Creating Embroidery Patterns From Images (Design Center)” on page 153.
Stage 1
Original Image Stage
Stage 2
Line Image Stage
Stage 3
Figure Handle Stage
Stage 4
Sew Setting Stage
Open an image file, and
select the colors to be used
for creating the outlines.
The original image is
converted to a black-and-
white line image.
Outlines can be drawn or
erased.
The line image is converted
to a figure handle image.
Points in the figure handle
image can be edited to
change the design.
The sew type and thread
colors are specified in the
outline to complete the
embroidery design.
Example:
The stripes in the scarf are
erased.
Stripes are added to the
scarf.
Example:
The eyes are moved, and
the facial expression is
changed.
A star is added to the tail of
the plane.
Example:
By applying colors different
than in the original image,
the design is given a
different appearance.
• If the data is saved, work can be stopped at each stage, then started again.
• Line image data is saved in the .pel format, and figure handle data is saved in the .pem format.
• The embroidery data is saved in the .pem format. To transfer .pem data created in Design Center to an
embroidery machine, import the pattern into Layout & Editing, and then write the data to an original card.
c
“Importing into Layout & Editing” on page 152" and “Transferring the design to an original card” on
page 17".
146
Basic Design Center Operations
Step 1
Original Image Stage
We will import an image and convert it to a line
image.
Click , and then select All Programs,
then PE-DESIGN 8, then Tools, then Design
Center.
Click .
Click .
Select the desired image file, and then click
Open.
In the Cut out to Line Image dialog box, click
the colors to be used for the outlines
(embroidery lines).
→ The selected color appears in a box on
the right side, and appears in the
check box to show that the color is
selected.
c
For details on other settings in the
Cut
out to Line Image
dialog box, refer to
“Extracting the outlines of an image” on
page 156.
After selecting the colors to be used for the
outlines, click OK.
→ The line image appears in the Design
Page.
1
2
3
4
5
If a color other than that for the
outline was selected, clear the
check box beside the color to
deselect it.
The desired color can be selected
more easily if the Zoom slider is
used to enlarge the image.
6
147
Basic Design Center Operations
Basic Design Center Operations
Step 2 Line Image Stage
In Line Image Stage, lines can be easily edited.
Lines can be drawn freehand with pen tools and can
easily be erased with the eraser tool.
To erase a line, right-click with a Pen tool
selected, or hold down the right mouse button
and drag the pointer.
Lines can also be erased with .
To draw lines, click a Pen tool.
Select the Pen tool with the desired thickness
of the line to be drawn.
Drag the pointer to draw a line.
When the line image is finished, click , or
click Stage, then To Figure Handle.
Click OK.
c
For details on other settings in the
Figure
Object Conversion Setting
dialog box,
refer to “Changing settings for converting
to outlines” on page 158.
→ The line image is converted to a figure
handle image.
b Memo:
To draw vertical or horizontal lines, hold down
the key while moving the pointer.
b Memo:
• If lines are drawn or erased incorrectly, click
Edit
, then
Undo
, or click (Undo button)
to undo the last operation.
• To change the display size, click ,
or .
1
2
Shift
b Memo:
Even after the line image is converted to a
figure handle image, you can return to the
Line Image Stage to edit the line image.
3
4
148
Basic Design Center Operations
Step 3 Figure Handle Stage
Points in the figure handle image can be moved,
added or deleted to change the design.
Sewing attributes cannot be applied to regions if the
region is not completely enclosed in an outline. In
this stage, fully enclose areas to be sewn as
regions.
■ Moving outlines
Click , and then click the outline to be
moved.
→ Handles appear, and the outline appears
in red.
Move the pointer over the outline so that the
shape of the pointer changes to , and then
drag the outline.
■ Adding lines to the figure handle
image
Click on the Tool Box.
Click in the Design Page to specify the start
point, and then click in the Design Page to
specify the next point.
→ A line is drawn connecting the two points.
Continue clicking to draw additional lines.
Double-click the end point.
1
2
Handle
b Memo:
• To remove the last point that was entered,
right-click.
• To draw vertical or horizontal lines, hold
down the key while moving the
pointer.
1
2
Shift
3
149
Basic Design Center Operations
Basic Design Center Operations
■ Reshaping outlines
Click on the Tool Box.
Click an outline.
→ The selected line appears in pink, and the
points appear as small squares.
To add a point, click the outline.
To create a corner, drag the point.
If the point is deleted, the corner is removed.
Click the point, and then press the
key, or click Edit, then Delete.
To change the shape of the line, drag the
point.
■ Splitting lines
Lines can be split at a point.
Perform steps and in “Reshaping
outlines” to select a line.
Click a point, and then click Edit, then Split to
split the line.
■ Connecting lines
Two points can be connected to form a line.
Perform steps and in “Reshaping
outlines” to select a line.
1
2
Point
Point at the end of line
3
4
Delete
b Memo:
If multiple points are selected, all of the points
will be moved or deleted. To select additional
points, hold down the key and click
each point, or drag the pointer over the points.
5
Ctrl
1 1 2
2
1 1 2
150
Basic Design Center Operations
While holding down the key, drag the
selected point to the other point that you want
to connect to it.
→ The shape of the pointer changes to ,
and a red square appears when the two
points are overlapping.
Release the mouse button to connect the two
points.
■ Continuing to the Sew Setting
Stage
When the figure handle image is finished, continue
to stage 4.
Click , or click
Stage
, then
To Sew Setting
.
Step 4 Sew Setting Stage
We are now going to apply sewing attributes to the
different parts of the outline to create the embroidery
pattern.
■ Using the Reference Window
This allows you to select colors while checking the
colors in the original image.
Click .
Click the Image tab.
→ The image opened in stage 1 appears.
■ Specifying sewing attributes
To specify sewing attributes, first select the color
and sew type, and then click the line or region where
the sewing attributes are to be applied.
Click , or .
: Click this button to apply sewing
attributes to the entire outline.
: Click this button to apply sewing
attributes to a portion of the outline.
: Click this button to apply sewing
attributes to a region.
→ The Sewing Attributes bar appears as
shown below.
For or
b Memo:
Even after continuing to the Sew Setting
Stage, you can return to the Figure Handle
Stage to edit the figure handle image.
2
Alt
3
1
b Memo:
If
Reference
has been clicked, click
Original
.
1
2
1
Line sew type selector
151
Basic Design Center Operations
Basic Design Center Operations
For
Click .
Click the desired color.
Click in a sew type selector, and then select
the desired sew type.
When using or , click the outline
where the sewing attributes are to be applied.
→ The sewing attributes are specified.
When using , click the region where the
sewing attributes are to be applied.
→ The sewing attributes are specified.
To change the sewing attributes, repeat steps
1 through 6.
Region sew type selector
2
3
4
5
6
152
Basic Design Center Operations
■ Importing into Layout & Editing
The embroidery pattern created in Design Center
can be imported into Layout & Editing, where it can
be edited and combined with other embroidery
patterns.
Click , or click Stage, then To Layout &
Editing.
→ Layout & Editing starts up.
Specify settings for Magnification and
Orientation.
The maximum magnification ratio that can be
specified is the ratio that enlarges the design
to the size of the Design Page. The minimum
magnification ratio is 25%.
Click Import.
→ The embroidery pattern created in Design
Center is imported into Layout & Editing.
a Note:
Sewing attributes for region cannot be
applied to open regions (regions not fully
enclosed in an outline), as shown in the
illustration below.
If attributes cannot be applied to a region,
return to the Figure Handle Stage and make
sure that region is closed. Edit any broken
lines with the Point Edit tool.
c
“Drawing a broken line” on
page 161.
b Memo:
From the
Sewing Attribute Setting
dialog
box, detailed settings for attributes, such as
the width of satin stitches and the run pitch,
can be specified.
c
“Specifying sewing attributes” on
page 165.
a Note:
If the sewing attributes of an outline or region
are not set, the embroidery pattern cannot
be imported.
b Memo:
An embroidery pattern (.pem data) created in
Design Center cannot be written to an original
card. Import the embroidery pattern into
Layout & Editing, and then write the data to a
card in order to transfer the pattern to an
embroidery machine.
1
2
3
153
Manually Creating Embroidery Patterns From Images (Design Center)
Manually Creating Embroidery Patterns From Images (Design Center)
Design Center Window
1 Toolbar
Provides shortcuts for the menu commands.
2 Sewing Attributes bar
Sets the sewing attributes (color and sew type) of the lines and regions in the pattern
(only in the Sew Setting stage)
3 Tool Box
Used to select and edit the image or pattern. Original Image Stage has no Tool Box; the other stages all
have a different tools in the Tool Box. (The window for the Sew Setting Stage is shown on this page.)
4 Reference Window
Displays all outlines and patterns in the work area, giving you an overview while you work on a detailed
area.
c
“Viewing outlines in the Reference Window” on page 161.
5 Design Page
The actual part of the work area that can be saved and sewn.
6 Work area
b Memo:
The default value for the design page size in this example is 100 × 100 mm (4 × 4 inches).
5
3
6
4
2
1
154
Manually Creating Embroidery Patterns From Images (Design Center)
Original Image Stage
Using the wizard
This wizard provides a step-by-step guide for
creating embroidery patterns.
1. Click File, then Wizard.
→ The How do you want to produce
embroidery? dialog box appears.
1From Image
Click this button when creating embroidery
pattern from an image.
Clicking this button displays the From Image
dialog box, and then continues with a step-by-
step guide for creating embroidery patterns.
c
“Opening an image” on page 155.
2 New Line Image
Clicking this button opens a new Design Page in
the Line Image Stage.
Click this button when you want to use the black
pen and eraser tools to draw an image, then
create an embroidery pattern from that image.
c
“Drawing a new line image freehand” on
page 157.
3 New Figure
Clicking this button opens a new Design Page in
the Figure Handle Stage.
Click this button when you want to draw a figure
handle image, or when you want to create
patterns from outlines taken from a previously
saved .pem file.
c
“Drawing a new figure handle image
freehand” on page 160.
4 Open PEM
Click this button when you want to edit a saved
.pem file (saved in the Figure Handle Stage or
the Sew Setting Stage).
Clicking this button displays the Open dialog
box so that a .pem file can be selected.
5 Most Recently Used Files
A list of the most recently edited files are
displayed.
From the list, click the name of the file, and then
click Open.
6 Always show Wizard at Startup
Select this check box to start up the wizard each
time Design Center is started up.
12
5
4
3
6
155
Manually Creating Embroidery Patterns From Images (Design Center)
Manually Creating Embroidery Patterns From Images (Design Center)
Opening an image
When you click the From Image button in the How
do you want to produce embroidery? dialog box,
the From Image dialog box appears.
1 Open Image File
Click this button to open a previously saved
image file and paste the image in the Design
Page.
There are many different types of files that can
be imported.
c
“Image file formats” on page 19.
2 From Clipboard
Clicking this button pastes the image on the
Clipboard into the Design Page. This function
can only be used when there is an image on the
Clipboard.
3 From TWAIN device
Click this button to import an image from a
TWAIN device (such as a scanner or digital
camera) connected to your computer, then
paste it in the Design Page.
4 Use Current image
Click this button to use an image opened in the
Original Image Stage. This function can only be
used when an image is opened in the Original
Image Stage.
Tips for scanning illustrations
for Design Center
• If the outline is not clear, trace the outline
on tracing paper.
• Better scanning results may be produced
by reducing the tone of the image.
Opening a file
A file can be opened directly without using the
wizard.
1. Click , or click File, then Open.
2. Select the drive and the folder.
3. From the Files of type box, select Image file.
4. To open a file, select it, and then click Open,
or double-click the file's icon.
b Memo:
To import an image from a file TWAIN device
• Connect the TWAIN device to the
computer, and then click
File
, then
Select TWAIN Device
, or click
From
TWAIN device
in the
From Image
dialog box. When the
Select Source
dialog box appears, select a device.
Next, click
File
, then
Input from
TWAIN device
.
• For information on using the driver
interface, refer to the help manual for
that interface, or contact the
manufacturer of the interface.
1
2
3
4
b Memo:
• If a .pel file is selected, the file is opened in
the Line Image Stage.
• If a .pem file is selected, the file is opened in
the Figure Handle Stage or the Sew Setting
Stage.
156
Manually Creating Embroidery Patterns From Images (Design Center)
Line Image Stage
After opening the image, continue to the Line Image Stage, where the color(s) that will be used to create the
line image (outline of the image) will be selected. In the Line Image Stage, you can edit the image using the
pen and eraser tools. You may also want to use these tools to create outlines that are easier to draw by hand,
for example, free-hand writing.
For details on drawing and erasing outlines, refer to Step 2, “Line Image Stage”, on page 147.
Extracting the outlines of
an image
Toolbar button:
1. Click , or click Stage, then To Line
Image.
→ The Cut out to Line Image dialog box
appears.
1. ZOOM slider
Use this slider to adjust the zoom ratio for
displaying the image.
2. Tone slider
Use this slider to reduce color tones in
images where it is difficult to select the
outline color.
3. Noise Reduction slider
Use this slider to reduce image noise
(distortions) in images where the outline is
not clear.
2. Click the outline color(s) to convert into black
outlines.
To extract the color boundaries, click Detect
Outlines check box.
3. Click Preview to preview the line image in the
Design Page.
b Memo:
• We recommend using a 16-color image,
since it may be difficult to pick colors from a
256-color or truecolor image during the
conversion to the Line Image Stage.
When using a 256-color or truecolor image,
use the
Tone
slider to adjust the image.
1
2
3
a Note:
If you started with the Figure Handle Stage
by opening a Figure Handle Stage file, you
cannot go to the Line Image Stage.
b Memo:
• When the extracting color boundaries using
Detect Outlines
, the colors are converted
to line image as shown below.
• To deselect a color, clear the corresponding
check box.
157
Manually Creating Embroidery Patterns From Images (Design Center)
Manually Creating Embroidery Patterns From Images (Design Center)
4. Click OK.
Drawing a new line image
freehand
Toolbar button:
1. Click , or click File, then New Line
Image.
→ A new Design Page immediately appears
in the Line Image Stage.
Using the Pen and Eraser tools, the line image
can be drawn freehand in the Design Page.
c
“Line Image Stage” on page 156.
c
“Saving embroidery patterns” on
page 169, and “Drawing a new figure
handle image freehand” on page 160
b Memo:
If you do not like the result, click to go
back to the Original Image Stage, and then
create the line image again.
b Memo:
In the Line Image Stage, the file will be saved
as a .pel file.
158
Manually Creating Embroidery Patterns From Images (Design Center)
Figure Handle Stage
After creating the outline, which is simply a collection of dots (or pixels) in the Line Image Stage, continue to
the Figure Handle Stage, where the dots are automatically connected to create lines that can be edited. In the
Figure Handle Stage, you can use the Point Edit tool to move, delete and insert points, or you can use the Line
tool to draw lines.
Changing settings for
converting to outlines
Toolbar button:
1. Click , or click Stage, then To Figure
Handle.
2. Select a setting under Resolution.
In general, Normal provides a sufficient
resolution without making the file too large.
If selecting Coarse gives a satisfactory result
for a particular image, select this setting in
order to keep the file as small as possible.
Select Fine only if the image contains many
small details, and the Normal setting does not
give a satisfactory result.
3. To replace the black outlines with figure
handle lines along the center of the outlines,
select the Thinning Process check box, and
then use the slider to select the degree of
detail.
To replace the black lines with figure handle
lines following the border of the outlines, clear
the Thinning Process check box.
4. Use the SIZE slider to set the size.
b Memo:
When the slider is set to
Much
, even very
thick black lines will be replaced with a line
along the center.
a Note:
You will not be able to enlarge the image
beyond the limits of the Design Page area. If
necessary, click
Design Page Property
,
and then change the Design Page size.
ON
OFF
159
Manually Creating Embroidery Patterns From Images (Design Center)
Manually Creating Embroidery Patterns From Images (Design Center)
5. Click OK.
Changing the background
image
■ Changing the display of the
background image
1. Click Display, then Display Template, and
then select the desired setting.
• To display the line image, click On.
• To display a faded copy of the line image,
click Faded.
• To hide the line image, click Off.
■ Changing the size and position of
the background image
1. Click Display, then Modify Template.
2. Drag the template image to move it to the
desired location.
Drag a handle to enlarge or reduce the size of
the template image.
Specifying the Design Page
size
1. Click Option, then Design Page Property.
2. Select the Design Page size.
To adjust the Design Page size according to
the hoop size, select Hoop Size, and then
select the desired hoop size from the selector.
To specify a custom Design Page size, select
Custom Size, and then type or select the
desired width and height for the Design Page.
3. Click OK.
b Memo:
To create outline data from a part of the
image, select the specific area by clicking
Pick Area
, then dragging the pointer (+) to
draw a selection frame around the area to be
selected.
a Note:
If the outline data cannot be created from the
image when moving from the Line Image
Stage to the Figure Handle Stage, even after
various outline conversion settings are
specified, return to the Line Image Stage, and
correct the outlines in the line image or apply
corrections to the image.
b Memo:
To return to the default settings (
100
×
100
mm
(
4"
×
4"
) of
Hoop Size
), click
Default
.
a Note:
Do not select a hoop size larger than the
embroidery hoop that can be used with your
machine.
160
Manually Creating Embroidery Patterns From Images (Design Center)
Drawing a new figure
handle image freehand
An empty Design Page can be created in order to
draw a figure handle image or to create patterns
from outlines taken from a previously saved .pem
file.
1. Click File, then New Figure Data.
→ A new Design Page appears.
Editing outlines
■ Selecting outlines
1. Click .
2. Click the outline.
3. To select an additional outline, hold down the
key and click the other outline.
■ Reshaping outlines
For details on moving points, inserting points,
deleting points and splitting/connecting points, refer
to “Figure Handle Stage” on page 148.
■ Scaling outlines
Scaling numerically:
1. Select the outline.
2. Click Edit, then Numerical Setting, then Size.
3. To change the width and height proportionally,
select the Maintain aspect ratio check box.
4. Select whether the width and height will be set
as a percentage (%) or a dimension
(millimeters or inches).
5. Type or select the desired width and height.
6. Click OK.
■ Flipping outlines horizontally or
vertically
1. Select the outline.
2. Click Edit, then Mirror, then Horizontal, or
click on the Toolbar.
Click Edit, then Mirror, then Vertical, or click
on the Toolbar.
■ Rotating outlines
Rotating manually:
1. Select the outline.
2. Click Edit, then Rotate, or click .
3. Move the pointer over one of the handles. And
then drag the rotation handle.
Rotating numerically:
1. Select the outline.
2. Click Edit, then Numerical Setting, then
Rotate.
3. Type or select the desired rotation angle.
4. Click OK.
b Memo:
• In the Figure Handle Stage, the file will be
saved as a .pem file.
• To retrieve data from a saved .pem file, use
the menu command
File
–
Import Figure
.
Ctrl
b Memo:
• An angle can also be selected by dragging
in the
Rotate
dialog box.
161
Manually Creating Embroidery Patterns From Images (Design Center)
Manually Creating Embroidery Patterns From Images (Design Center)
Drawing a broken line
The line drawing mode allows you to add broken
lines to your pattern. A broken line is made of one or
more adjacent straight lines, in other words, the end
point of one straight line is the start point of the next
one.
If the broken line that you drew did not create
enclosed regions, it remains a simple outline, and
you can only set sewing attributes for the line itself
in the Sew Setting Stage.
If the broken line created enclosed regions, you can
assign sew types and colors to both the outline and
the regions in the Sew Setting Stage.
If you draw a line through an existing region,
creating two separate regions, you will be able to set
sewing attributes for both regions separately, as
well as for the separating line.
For details on drawing lines, refer to “Adding lines to
the figure handle image” on page 148.
Changing application
settings
■
Changing the grid settings
A grid of dotted lines or solid lines can be displayed
or hidden, and the spacing for the grid can be
adjusted. (This function is available only in the
Figure Handle Stage.)
1. Click Display, then Grid Setup.
2. To display the grid, select the Show Grid
check box.
To hide the grid, clear the Show Grid check
box.
3. To set the grid spacing, type or select a value
in the Grid interval box.
4. To display the grid as solid lines, select the
with Axes check box.
To display the grid as dots (intersecting points
of the grid) , clear the with Axes check box.
5. Click OK to apply the changes and to close the
dialog box.
■ Changing the measurement units
The measurements for values displayed in the
application can be in either millimeters or inches.
1. Click Option, then Select System Unit, and
then select the desired measurement units
(mm or inch).
Viewing outlines in the
Reference Window
All outlines in the Design Page are displayed in the
Reference Window, giving you an overall view of the
outline while you work on a detailed area. The
display area frame (red rectangle) indicates the part
of the outline displayed in the Design Page.
In addition, the image being used to create the
embroidery pattern or the embroidery pattern being
created and a different image can be displayed in
the Reference Window in the Figure Handle Stage
and the Sew Setting Stage.
To switch between displaying and hiding the
Reference window, click Display, then Reference
Window, or click , or press the shortcut key
().
Broken lines with two regions
Broken line without a region Broken line with region
End point
Start point
F11
162
Manually Creating Embroidery Patterns From Images (Design Center)
■ Zooming
The Reference Window can be switched to display
either the entire Design Page or only the embroidery
pattern.
1. Click the Pan/Zoom tab, click .
■ Moving the display area frame
The part of the outline displayed in the Design Page
can be selected from the Reference Window.
1. Move the pointer over the display area frame.
2. Drag the display area frame so that it
surrounds the desired part of the outline.
→ The selected part of the outline is
displayed in the Design Page.
■ Redrawing the display area frame
Instead of moving the display area frame, the frame
can be redrawn to display the desired part of the
outline in the Design Page.
1. Click the area to be displayed, or drag the
pointer over the desired part of the outline in
the Reference Window.
■ Scaling the display area frame
1. Move the pointer over a corner of the display
area frame.
2. Drag the corner to adjust the display area
frame to the desired size.
■ Displaying a different reference
image
The embroidery pattern being created and a
different image can be displayed in the Reference
Window.
1. Click the Image tab.
2. Click Reference, then click .
3. Select the reference image, and then click
Open.
163
Manually Creating Embroidery Patterns From Images (Design Center)
Manually Creating Embroidery Patterns From Images (Design Center)
Sew Setting Stage
After editing the outline in the Figure Handle Stage, continue to the Sew Setting Stage, where the sewing
attributes can be set. Use the zooming tools available to display the pattern enlarged or reduced.
Toolbar button:
1. Click , or click Stage, then To Sew
Setting.
→ The pattern is displayed in the Design
Page of the Sew Setting Stage.
Applying sewing attributes
to lines and regions
■ Region sewing
Applying sewing attributes to regions
1. Click on the Tool Box.
2. If necessary, change the color and sew type.
c
“Using the sewing attributes bar” on
page 164
3. Click the enclosed region to apply the sewing
attributes.
→ “Marching lines” appear around the
selected region, and the color and sew
type selected on the Sewing Attributes
bar are applied to the region.
b Memo:
• You can change the color and sew type either before or after applying sewing attributes to the region.
c
“Color” on page 165 and “Sew type” on page 165.
• You can also use the settings in the
Sewing Attribute Setting
dialog box to define other attributes of the sew type.
c
“Specifying sewing attributes” on page 165.
b Memo:
In the Sew Setting Stage, the colors of the
Design Page and background can be
changed from the
Design Page Property
dialog box (displayed by clicking
Option
, then
Design Page Property
in the menu).
a Note:
If the attributes cannot be applied to a
region, go back to the Figure Handle Stage
and make sure that region is closed. Edit any
broken lines with the Point Edit tool.
164
Manually Creating Embroidery Patterns From Images (Design Center)
■ Line sewing
1. Click or on the Tool Box.
2. If necessary, change the color and sew type.
c
“Using the sewing attributes bar” on
page 164.
3. Click the outline to apply the sewing attributes.
→ “Marching lines” appears along the
selected outline, and the color and sew
type selected on the Sewing Attributes
bar are applied to the outline.
Using the sewing attributes
bar
The Sewing Attributes bar, available in the Sew
Setting Stage, allows you to set the color and sew
type of region and outlines.
The sewing attributes that are available depend on
the tool selected in the Tool Box.
Example 1: When on the Tool Box is selected
Example 2: When or on the Tool Box is
selected
b Memo:
• Although a region may seem closed, if the
sewing attributes cannot be specified for the
region, the region may not actually be
closed. To find the opening in the region,
use the line drawing mode in the Figure
Handle Stage to divide the region into
smaller regions, and then check which
region sewing attributes cannot be applied
to in the Sew Setting Stage.
• Point edit mode is useful for closing regions.
• After sewing attributes have been specified,
right-clicking an area where settings have
been specified displays the
Sewing
Attribute Setting
dialog box so that
detailed sewing attribute settings can be
viewed.
b Memo:
• When on the Tool Box is selected,
settings are applied only to a portion of the
clicked outline.
• After sewing attributes have been specified,
right-clicking a line where settings have
been specified displays the
Sewing
Attribute Setting
dialog box so that
detailed sewing attribute settings can be
viewed.
Region sew: Switches on/off
sewing for the region.
Line sew: Switches on/off
sewing for the line.
Region color, Line color:
Click this button to set the
thread color for lines or regions.
Region sew type, Line sew
type:
Use these selectors to set
the sew type for lines or regions.
165
Manually Creating Embroidery Patterns From Images (Design Center)
Manually Creating Embroidery Patterns From Images (Design Center)
■ Region sew / Line sew
switches on/off region sewing; switches
on/off line sewing.
1. Clicking the button switches between the two
settings. Click the button to switch on or off
sewing.
On: The Region color/Line color button and
the Region sew type/Line sew type selector
are displayed.
2. Click the region or outline where the sewing
attributes are to be applied.
If region sewing or line sewing has been
switched on, the regions or lines appear in the
selected thread color. If it has been switched
off, the regions appear in white or the outlines
appear as dotted lines.
■ Color
Click this button to set the thread color for lines or
regions.
1. Click the Color button.
2. From the Thread Chart selector, select a
thread color chart or a user thread chart.
3. From the list of thread colors, click the desired
color.
→ The new color is displayed on the Region
color button or Line color button.
4. Click the region or outline to apply the color
setting.
■ Sew type
Use these selectors to set the sew type for lines or
regions.
1. Click in a sew type selector.
2. Click the desired sew type.
3. Click the region or outline to apply the sew
type setting.
■ Specifying sewing attributes
Various sewing attributes for lines and regions can
be set in the Sewing Attribute Setting dialog box.
Toolbar button:
1. Click .
b Memo:
When line sewing or region sewing is
switched off, the lines or regions are not sewn.
Region sew
Region color
Region sew type
Line sew
Line color
Line sew type
b Memo:
For details on the four buttons under the list,
refer to “Special colors” on page 95.
b Memo:
The region sew attributes appear in the
Sewing Attribute Setting
dialog box when
on the Tool Box is selected. The line
sew attributes appear in the
Sewing Attribute
Setting
dialog box when or on the
Tool Box is selected.
Line sew type
Region sew type
Line sew type
Region sew type
166
Manually Creating Embroidery Patterns From Images (Design Center)
Beginner mode:
Expert mode:
:
Click to return to the default setting.
To Expert mode/To Beginner mode:
Click to switch the mode.
:
Click to load/save the sewing settings.
c
“Saving frequently used sewing
attributes” on page 109.
Hide Hint/Show Hint:
Click to switch between displaying and hiding the
hint view. With each change in the sewing attributes,
a preview of the stitching can be checked here.
2. To display only basic sewing attributes and
simpler settings, click To Beginner mode.
To display all of the sewing attributes and
settings available for the selected sew type,
click To Expert mode.
3. If necessary, change the sewing attributes
displayed under Line sew or Region sew.
c
For details on the different sewing
attributes and settings, refer to “Line
sewing attributes” on page 98 and
“Region sewing attributes” on page 101
and “Region sewing attributes” on
page 109. In addition, frequently used
sewing attributes can be saved. For
details, refer to “Saving the settings in a
list” on page 109.
4. When the line sewing attributes are displayed,
click an outline to apply the line sewing
attributes to the outline.
When the region sewing attributes are
displayed, click a region to apply the region
sewing attributes to the region.
For line sewing For region sewing
For line sewing For region sewing
b Memo:
• The sewing attributes displayed in the
dialog box depend on the selected sew
type.
b Memo:
• Settings that cannot be selected in
Beginner mode
are retained from the
previous setting in
Expert mode
.
a Note:
All settings made in the dialog box are
retained and will be applied regardless of the
mode, until they are changed.
167
Manually Creating Embroidery Patterns From Images (Design Center)
Manually Creating Embroidery Patterns From Images (Design Center)
■ Creating a gradation
With a satin stitch, fill stitch or programmable fill
stitch, the density of the color can be adjusted at
various locations to create a custom gradation
pattern.
1. In Expert mode of the Sewing Attribute
Setting dialog box, select the Gradation
check box.
2. Click Pattern.
3. To select a preset gradation pattern, click the
desired pattern under Select pattern.
4. Move the sliders to adjust the density of the
gradation pattern.
5. Click OK.
Saving frequently used
sewing attributes
Frequently used sewing attributes can be saved
together, and recalled when specifying sewing
attributes.
Perform this operation in the same way that it is
performed in Layout & Editing. For details, refer to
“Saving frequently used sewing attributes” on
page 109.
Applying effects to concentric
circle and radial stitches
In order to increase the decorative effect, you can
move the center point of regions set to the
concentric circle stitch or radial stitch.
1. Click on the Tool Box.
2. Select the desired color and sew type
(Concentric Circle Stitch or Radial Stitch).
3. Click the region.
→ The center point ( ) appears.
4. Drag the center point to the desired location.
a Note:
An additional color (used for blending in
Layout & Editing) cannot be specified with
the gradation setting in Design Center.
b Memo:
To move the center point later, click , and
then right click the region with the concentric
circle stitch or radial stitch applied. The center
point appears and can be moved.
168
Manually Creating Embroidery Patterns From Images (Design Center)
Preventing overlapping stitching
of regions (hole sewing)
By specifying hole sewing, the stitching in
overlapping regions will not be sewn twice. Hole
sewing can be set only when one region completely
encloses another.
1. Click on the Tool Box.
2. Click the region that completely encloses
another region.
3. Click OK to set hole sewing.
Applying stamps
Stamps created with Programmable Stitch Creator
can be applied to regions in the Sew Setting Stage
of Design Center. Some stamp patterns are
provided with this application; however, by using
Programmable Stitch Creator, you can edit the
patterns that are provided or you can create your
own.
Click to apply a stamp. To edit the applied
stamp, click .
Settings for stamps are specified in the same way
that they are in Layout & Editing.
c
“Applying and editing Stamps” on
page 114.
Checking and editing the
sewing order
The sewing order of pattern colors as well as the
sewing order of pattern objects of the same color can
be checked and modified as necessary.
1. Click , or click Sew, then Sewing Order.
2.
To change the sewing order of a color, select
the frame for the color, and then drag the frame
to the desired position.
→ A red line appears, indicating the position
where the frame is being moved.
b Memo:
To cancel hole sewing, click the white inner
region. The inner region will be sewn twice
when it appears in the same color as the outer
region.
b Memo:
• To select additional frames, hold down the
or key and select each
frame.
• The frames containing regions are
separated from the frames containing
outlines with a thick vertical line. Frames
from one side of the line cannot be moved
to the other side.
• To enlarge the pattern for better viewing,
click .
Shift
Ctrl
169
Manually Creating Embroidery Patterns From Images (Design Center)
Manually Creating Embroidery Patterns From Images (Design Center)
3. To view the sewing order of multiple patterns
of the same color, select the frame, and then
click the Part tab.
→ The individual patterns with the same
color appear in different frames.
4. To change the sewing order of a pattern,
select the frame for the pattern, and then drag
the frame to the desired position.
5. Click OK to apply the changes and to close the
dialog box.
Checking the stitching
The actual stitching as it will be performed by the
sewing machine can be viewed using the stitch
simulator.
To view stitching using the stitch simulator, click
, or click Display, then click Stitch Simulator.
The stitch simulator is used in the same way that it
is in Layout & Editing.
c
“Checking the stitching” on page 66.
Viewing embroidery patterns
in the Reference Window
Embroidery patterns can be viewed in the
Reference Window in the Sew Setting Stage in the
same way that they are in the Figure Handle Stage.
c
“Viewing outlines in the Reference
Window” on page 161.
Saving embroidery
patterns
The file can be saved at each stage.
■ Overwriting
1. Click , or click File, then Save.
→ The file is saved.
■ Saving with a new name
The current file can be saved with a different file
name in order to keep the original unchanged or to
keep various versions of the same image or pattern.
1. Click File, then Save As.
2. Select the drive and the folder, and then type
in the file name.
3. Click Save to save the data.
b Memo:
• The correct extension is automatically
selected.
• Image data from the Original Image
Stage can be saved as a bitmap file
(.bmp).
In the Line Image Stage, image data is
saved as a .pel file.
In the Figure Handle Stage and the Sew
Setting Stage, pattern data is saved as a
.pem file.
• If a .pem file is not imported into Layout &
Editing, the pattern cannot be written to
an original card in order to transfer it to an
embroidery machine.
c
“Importing into Layout & Editing”
on page 152.
a Note:
If you select a file type of a previous software
version, saved .pem files can be opened
with that version of the software; however,
some information may be lost.
170
About the Instruction Manual (PDF Format)
For details on Design Database, Programmable Stitch Creator and Font Creator, refer to the Instruction
Manual (PDF format).
For a better understanding of the PE-DESIGN operations, an advanced tutorial, tips and techniques, and lists
of menus/tools for each application are provided in the Instruction Manual (PDF format). In addition, this
manual contains a troubleshooting section. Refer to this section if you have any problems while using this
software.
Contents of the Instruction Manual (PDF format)
Tutorial (Advanced)................................. 171
Entering Monograms........................................171
Creating Appliqués ..........................................174
Creating Split Embroidery Designs..................176
Creating Design for Multi-Position Hoops........182
Managing Embroidery Design Files
(Design Database) ................................... 187
Basic Programmable Stitch Creator
Operations ............................................... 199
Creating Custom Stitch Patterns
(Programmable Stitch Creator) .............. 205
Basic Font Creator Operations .............. 217
Creating Custom Fonts
(Font Creator) .......................................... 225
Tips and Techniques ...............................237
Enlarging/Reducing Stitch Patterns ................ 237
Sewing Direction ............................................. 237
Sewing Order .................................................. 237
Sewing Wide Areas......................................... 238
Jump Stitch and Jump Stitch Trimming........... 238
Fonts Suitable for Embroidering...................... 239
Creating Outlined Characters (Using Text
Converted to Outline Object)........................... 240
Converting Characters (Japanese, Chinese,
Korean, etc) to Embroidery Patterns............... 241
Menus/Tools.............................................243
Layout & Editing.............................................. 243
Design Center ................................................. 249
Design Database............................................. 254
Programmable Stitch Creator.......................... 256
Font Creator.................................................... 259
Troubleshooting ......................................262
171
Tutorial (Advanced)
Tutorial (Advanced)
Entering Monograms
Using the monogram function, ornamented characters arranged in a decorative pattern can be created.
This procedure will go through each step of the basic operation.
The sample file for this tutorial can be found at the following location.
Documents(My Documents)\PE-DESIGN 8\Tutorial\Tutorial_7
Step 1 Creating monograms
Start up Layout & Editing.
Click , then .
Diamond and script fonts are exclusively used
for monograms. But you can use other built-in
fonts and TrueType Fonts.
The illustration above allows you to change
the font, size and sew type.
Click in the Design Page where you want the
monogram to appear.
Type “ABC” using the computer key board.
To add a decorative pattern around or at the
sides of the monogram, select the Add
Decorative Pattern check box. And then,
click Select Pattern.
Step 1 Creating monograms
Step 2 Changing the font and character size
Step 3 Changing the thread color and sew type
Step 4 Adjusting the size and position of the decorative pattern
1
2
3
4
a Note:
• You can also enter a character by
selecting it in the character table, then
clicking
Insert
, or simply by double-
clicking it.
• You cannot insert line feeds. If you press
the key, the dialog closes and the
monogram pattern is displayed in the
Design Page.
Enter
5
172
Tutorial (Advanced)
Click a decorative pattern to select it, and then
click Select.
Click OK.
→ The monogram is displayed in the Design
Page with the selected decorative pattern.
Step 2 Changing the font and
character size
Next, we will change the font and character size of
the monogram.
Click . Then click the monogram.
Change the font by clicking on the pulldown
arrow and selecting a font.
Change the character size.
Step 3 Changing the thread color
and sew type
The thread color and sew type for the monogram
can be changed.
Click , then .
Then Click the monogram.
6
7
1
b Memo:
Diamond and Script are fonts exclusively for
monograms. You can also use the built-in
fonts or TrueType fonts. (For more details,
refer to “Entering Monograms” on page 90.)
2
Monogram font
name
Monogram font sample
3
1
173
Tutorial (Advanced)
Tutorial (Advanced)
To select a single character, click the point for
the character that you want to select.
Click .
Clicking a color in the color palette changes
the thread color for the selected character.
Click Stitch Selector, then click the pulldown
arrow on the right side, and then select a sew
type.
→ The thread sew type for the selected
character is changed.
Step 4
Adjusting the size and position
of the decorative pattern
The size and position of the decorative pattern can
be adjusted.
Click . Then Click the decorative pattern.
Move the pointer over one of the handles of
the selected pattern.
Drag the handle to adjust the pattern to the
desired size.
Move the pointer over the selected pattern so
that the shape of the pointer changes to ,
and then drag the pattern to the desired
position.
2
3
4
1
2
3
174
Tutorial (Advanced)
Creating Appliqués
The Applique Wizard provides instructions for easily creating appliqués.
This procedure will go through each step of the basic operation.
When creating appliqués, data will be specified in the following order.
1 Applique Material
2 Applique Position
3 Tack down
4 Covering Stitch
For details on embroidering appliqués, refer to the Operation Manual
included with the machine.
The sample file for this tutorial can be found at the following location.
Documents(My Documents)\PE-DESIGN 8\Tutorial\Tutorial_8
Step 1
Creating an appliqué pattern
An appliqué can be created from any shape.
In the following steps, we will draw a circle and
create an appliqué.
Start up Layout & Editing.
To draw a circle click on , then .
Then drag the pointer in the Design Page to
the desired size.
Step 2
Using the Applique Wizard
Click Sew, then Applique Wizard menu.
Under Applique Material, select whether
(Yes) or not (No) the outline of the appliqué is
to be sewn onto the appliqué fabric as a guide
for cutting it out.
Step 1 Creating an appliqué pattern
Step 2 Using the Applique Wizard
1
2
3
1
2
175
Tutorial (Advanced)
Tutorial (Advanced)
The
Applique Position
, (guideline for attaching
the appliqué piece) is set to be sewn automatically.
Under Tack down, select whether (Yes) or
not (No) the appliqué is to be basted onto the
base fabric. If Yes is selected, select the
basting stitch from the selector. You can also
select which stitch (Satin Stitch, E Stitch or V
Stitch) to use for the basting.
Under Covering Stitch, select the sew type
and other attributes for finishing the appliqué.
Click OK to finish the Applique Wizard and
display the design in the Design Page.
→ The generated appliqué pattern is
displayed on the Design Page of Layout &
Editing.
3
4
Satin Stitch
E Stitch
V Stitch
5
6
176
Tutorial (Advanced)
Creating Split Embroidery Designs
Layout & Editing has a function for creating split embroidery designs when the embroidery pattern being
created is larger than the embroidery hoop.
The sample file for this tutorial can be found at the following location.
Documents(My Documents)\PE-DESIGN 8\Tutorial\Tutorial_9
Step 1 Specifying the Design Page
size in Layout & Editing
First, we will specify the size of the Design Page
to match the size of the embroidery design.
Start up Layout & Editing.
Click Option, then Design Page Property.
Select Custom Size, and then type or select
the desired width and height for the Design
Page.
The setting range for Width and Height is
100 mm to 1000 mm (3.9 inch to 39.4 inch).
This setting is to specify the exact width and
height of a design.
For this example, set width to 230 mm and
height to 330 mm.
Click in the
Section Size (for Hoop Size)
selector, and then select the size of the sections
(your embroidery hoop). For this example,
select
120
×
170 mm (130
×
180 mm)
.
Click OK.
Step 1 Specifying the Design Page size in Layout & Editing
Step 2 Creating the embroidery design
Step 3 Checking the embroidering order
Step 4 Attaching stabilizer to the fabric
Step 5 Marking the embroidering position
Step 6 Hooping the fabric
Step 7 Embroidering
1
2
3
b Memo:
•With the
Section Size (for Hoop Size)
setting, the width and height of the sections
are 10mm smaller than the actual hoop size
in order to provide space for fine positioning
adjustments with adjustment sections. The
10mm is for overlapping.
• It is not necessary for the
Section Size (for
Hoop Size)
to match the Design Page size.
Select the hoop size to be used for sewing.
4
5
177
Tutorial (Advanced)
Tutorial (Advanced)
Step 2 Creating the embroidery
design
For this example, we will use one of the lace
embroidery patterns provided with the software.
Click File, then Import or click .
Click , then , and then
click the Documents (My Documents) folder,
then PE-DESIGN 8, then Sample, then
Layout & Editing.
Then, select the file Largelace.pes.
c
“Importing embroidery designs” on
page 48.
Step 3 Checking the embroidering
order
Before the embroidery pattern is sewn, check the
embroidering order to see the order that the
design sections are sewn and determine which
parts of the fabric should be hooped.
The design sections are sewn in order from left to
right, top to bottom.
Click Option on the menu bar, and then click
Design Property.
To display information for the other design
sections in the emboroidery, click on Next and
Previous to move back and forth through
each section.
Check the design, and then click Close.
1
2
b Memo:
The embroidery order cannot be checked
while the pattern is selected; therefore, be
sure to deselect the pattern before trying to
check the embroidery order.
1
2
178
Tutorial (Advanced)
Step 4 Attaching stabilizer to the
fabric
Stabilizer must always be used when
embroidering to stabilize the fabric. There are
many types of stabilizer; the type that you will use
depends on the type of fabric that you are
embroidering on. For large-size designs that are
split into sections, the stabilizer must be adhered
to the fabric, for example, by using iron-on
stabilizer, sticky stabilizer or spray adhesive.
When using spray adhesive, spray the adhesive
onto a hooped piece of stabilizer that is strong
enough for the entire large-size embroidery. In
some cases, you may need to use two pieces of
stabilizer for your embroidery.
Step 5
Marking the embroidering
position
Using the template for the size of hoop that you
are using, mark the embroidering position on the
fabric.
Punch a hole at the end of each arrow on the
template.
Place the template on the fabric, and then
insert the tip of a marking pen into each hole
to mark the fabric.
Connect the points marked on the fabric to
draw reference lines.
a Note:
Before an embroidery pattern created in a
custom Design Page is saved or transferred
to an original card, running stitches are
added at the edges of the design sections so
that the design sections can easily be
aligned during sewing. This alignment
stitching appears in the
NOT DEFINED
color
and cannot be edited.
c
“Memo” on page 181.
a Note:
• For best results, attach the stabilizer to the
fabric (as described on this page). Without
the correct stabilizer, the design may
become misaligned due to puckering in
the fabric.
• Be sure to check the recommendations on
the stabilizer package.
b Memo:
• The templates are included in the package.
• The templates are also in the
Template
folder and can be printed out with a printer.
• Template PDF files have been described
within actual size completely. Please
confirm the printing property of your
Adobe
®
Reader
®
program. If some printing
properties such like “Reduce/Enlarge to fit
page” would be “Checked”, the Adobe
®
Reader
®
will resize the PDF automatically.
So, please “Uncheck” these properties
before your printing out.
1
2
3
179
Tutorial (Advanced)
Tutorial (Advanced)
Place the template on the fabric, and mark
points A, B, C and D.
To mark an area to the right of the previously
marked area, align points A and D on the
template with marks B and C on the fabric.
To mark an area below the previously marked
area, align points A and B on the template with
marks C and D on the fabric.
Repeat steps 4 through 6 to reposition the
template and draw the embroidering position
for each section of the embroidery pattern.
Step 6 Hooping the fabric
Using the hoop’s plastic embroidery sheet, align the
reference lines on the embroidery sheet with the marks
on the fabric. Then, hoop the fabric while making sure
that the fabric remains correctly aligned.
Insert the embroidery sheet into the inner ring
of the embroidery hoop, and then place them
on top of the fabric with the centerline on the
embroidery sheet aligned with the reference
lines (drawn on the fabric) for the first pattern
section to be sewn.
4
AB
DC
5
AB
DC
AB
DC
6
AB
DC
AB
DC
7
a Note:
• The intersection of the horizontal and
vertical line indicates the center of the
embroidery hoop.
•
While carefully considering how the fabric
will be hooped, place the template on the
fabric, and then draw lines to indicate the
embroidering position. In addition, because
all embroidery areas are not drawn on the
template for large embroidery hoops, be
careful that the embroidery area does not
extend from the marked area on the fabric as
shown below.
1
180
Tutorial (Advanced)
Keeping the reference lines on the embroidery
sheet aligned with the reference lines for the
first pattern section, place the fabric and inner
ring of the embroidery hoop into the outer ring
of the hoop, and then pull the fabric so that it
is tight.
Finish hooping the fabric, and then remove the
embroidery sheet.
Step 7 Embroidering
Now, we are ready to embroider the design.
When large-size embroidery design are
transferred to the embroidery machine, the
patterns appear on the embroidery machine
display as shown below. For this example,
select the first embroidery pattern section
(Aa).
Attach the embroidery hoop to the embroidery
machine, and then using the machine’s layout
adjusting functions, align the needle position
with the intersection of the lines drawn on the
fabric.
Embroider the selected pattern.
Remove the embroidery hoop from the
embroidery machine, and then remove the
fabric from the hoop.
Hoop the fabric for the next design section.
c
“Hooping the fabric” on page 179.
a Note:
• Place the fabric and hoop on a level
surface, and then make sure that the inner
ring is pressed in well enough that the top
edge of the inner ring aligns with the top
edge of the outer ring.
• If the embroidery sheet is not used, the
marks on the embroidery hoop can be
used to hoop the fabric vertically and
horizontally.
However, since the center point on some
embroidery machines is off center, the
embroidery sheet should be used for best
results.
• Another way to hoop the fabric is to use
sticky stabilizer that can be hooped
separately, tear away the protective
paper, then carefully align the fabric onto
the sticky surface using the embroidery
sheet as a guide.
• Tip: The fabric can be hooped more easily
if double-sided tape is affixed to the back
of the inner ring, which is placed on top of
the fabric, and then the fabric is clamped
between the inner ring and the outer ring.
2
3
b Memo:
If there is no stitching in section Aa, select the
first section that contains stitching. Select the
menu command
Option – Design Property
to check the embroidering order.
1
2
3
4
5
181
Tutorial (Advanced)
Tutorial (Advanced)
Continue hooping the fabric and embroidering
until the entire embroidery design is sewn.
b Memo:
When an embroidery design created in a
custom Design Page is saved or transferred to
an original card, alignment stitching (single
lines of running stitches with the color
NOT
DEFINED
, with a pitch of 7.0 mm, and starting
with fixed stitches with a pitch of 0.3 mm) is
added at the edges of the design sections.
(The alignment stitching appears in the print
preview and is printed in red.)
Example for hooping fabric using the
alignment stitching with Largelace.pes
(Largelace.pes can be found in the
Documents (My Documents)\
PE-DESIGN8\Sample\
Layout & Editing
folder.):
1) Embroider the upper-left design section.
→
Alignment stitching is sewn below and
on the right side of the embroidered
design section.
2) Hoop the fabric for the upper-right design
section with the left side of the hoop
aligned on the alignment stitching on the
right side of the design section sewn in
step 1, and then embroider the design.
→
Before the design section is
embroidered, alignment stitching is
sewn on the left side. Make sure that
this alignment stitching aligns with the
alignment stitching sewn in step 1.
After the design section is
embroidered, alignment stitching is
sewn below the design section.
3) Hoop the fabric for the lower-left design
section with the top of the hoop aligned
on the alignment stitching at the bottom
of the design section sewn in step 1, and
then embroider the design.
→
Before the design section is
embroidered, alignment stitching is
sewn at the top. Make sure that this
alignment stitching aligns with the
alignment stitching sewn in step 1.
After the design section is
embroidered, alignment stitching is
sewn on the right side of the design
section.
4) Hoop the fabric for the lower-right design
section with the left side of the hoop
aligned on the alignment stitching on the
right side of the design section sewn in
step 3 and with the top of the hoop
aligned on the alignment stitching at the
bottom of the design section sewn in
step 2, and then embroider the design.
→
Before the design section is
embroidered, alignment stitching is
sewn on the left side and at the top.
Make sure that this alignment
stitching aligns with the alignment
stitching sewn in step 3 and in step 2.
6
182
Tutorial (Advanced)
Creating Design for Multi-Position Hoops
This program enables you to create multi-position design that you can stitch in any multi-position hoop
attached to your embroidery machine.
Although the size of the design that can be embroidered using an multi-position hoop is 130 × 180 mm (or 100
× 100 mm, depending on the sewing area of the embroidery machine), first determine which of the three
installation positions (indicated as a, b, and c in the illustration above) the multi-position hoop will be installed
at and determine the orientation of the design.
When creating the design, each design section can only be as large as the sewing area of the embroidery
machine.
The sample file for this tutorial can be found at the following location.
Documents(My Documents)\PE-DESIGN 8\Tutorial\Tutorial_10
Step 1 Selecting the Design Page
size
In Layout & Editing, click Option, then Design
Page Property.
→ The Design Page Property dialog box
appears.
Select Hoop Size, and then choose a Design
Page size of 130 × 300 mm, or 100 × 172 mm,
from the selector.
a
b
c
a
b
c
ABC
Example of multi-position hoop: 100 × 172 mm hoop
Step 1 Selecting the Design Page size
Step 2 Creating the design
Step 3 Optimizing hoop changes
Step 4 Checking the pattern
1
b Memo:
• Settings for multi-position hoops are
indicated by “
”.
• Choose the appropriate setting after
checking the size of the hoop available for
your machine.
a Note:
Multi-position hoop settings are not available
in the
Design Page Property
dialog box of
Design Center.
2
183
Tutorial (Advanced)
Tutorial (Advanced)
Step 2 Creating the design
The Design Page appears on the screen as
shown below.
Create the design, making sure that it meets
the following conditions.
If this design is written to an original card and
the written pattern is checked on the
embroidery machine, it appears as shown
below.
• The size of one pattern must be no larger
than 100 × 100 mm (or 130 × 180 mm).
• Each pattern must completely fit within a
single area (a, b, or c).
Step 3 Optimizing hoop changes
With the Optimize hoop change function, the
sewing order of patterns in a Design Page for
multi-position hoops is automatically optimized,
therefore reducing the risk of the embroidery
being sewn incorrectly or the fabric not feeding
evenly when the hoop position is changed too
often.
b Memo:
Area a: Embroidering area when the multi-
position hoop is installed at the top installation
position.
Area b: Embroidering area when the multi-
position hoop is installed at the middle
installation position.
Area c: Embroidering area when the multi-
position hoop is installed at the bottom
installation position.
The dotted lines separate each area.
1
a
b
c
2
a
b
c
b Memo:
1: The position of this pattern is correct since
it fits completely within area a.
2:
The position of this pattern is correct since it
fits completely within either area b or area c.
3: The size of this pattern is acceptable, but
its position must be corrected since it does
not fit completely within any of the areas.
(It will be necessary to correct the position
in order to fit in either b or c.)
4: This pattern must be corrected since it is
too large.
(It will be necessary to correct the position
and size in order to fit in either a, b, or c.)
a Note:
If a pattern does not meet the conditions
mentioned above, a warning will appear
when continuing to the next step.
a
b
c
4
3
2
1
184
Tutorial (Advanced)
Click Sew, then Optimize hoop change.
Step 4 Checking the pattern
Click Option, then Design Property.
→ At the same time that the Design
Property dialog box appears, the Design
Page is automatically zoomed in or out to
fit in the entire window.
b Memo:
• A check mark appears when this function is
turned on; no check mark is displayed when
this function is turned off.
• When the Optimize hoop change function is
turned on, the sewing order that you have
set is optimized to reduce the number of
times that the hoop installation position is
changed.
For the example shown on this page, the
sewing order is: a (pattern 1)
→
b (pattern 2)
→
a (patterns 3 & 5)
→
c (patterns 4 & 6)
If the Optimize hoop change function is
turned off, each pattern is sewn according
to the sewing order that you have set.
For the example shown on this page, the
sewing order is: a (pattern 1)
→
b (pattern 2)
→
a (pattern 3)
→
c (pattern 4)
→
a (pattern
5)
→
c (pattern 6)
Therefore, since the number of times for
changing the hoop installation position is
not optimized, it may be changed more
often than if it was optimized.
a Note:
Since the pattern may not be sewn correctly
or the fabric may not feed evenly if the hoop
installation position is changed too often, we
recommend turning on the Optimize hoop
change function. Turning on this function will
change the sewing order that you have set,
therefore, check the sewing order before you
begin embroidering.
1
a
b
c
4
2
1
3
5
6
a Note:
Make sure that no pattern has been selected
before clicking this command. If a pattern
has already been selected, only the
information for that pattern is displayed.
b Memo:
• The first line of the dialog box shows the
position in the hoop installation order for the
currently displayed pattern.
• Only the patterns that would be sewn at the
current position in the hoop installation
order appear in the Design Page, and the
embroidering area for the current hoop
position is outlined in red.
• To display information for patterns at other
positions in the hoop installation order, click
Previous
or
Next
. At this time, the
corresponding pattern and hoop position
appear in the Design Page.
a Note:
If a pattern is larger than the embroidery
area or if a pattern is positioned so that it
does not completely fit within an embroidery
area, the error message “Please change the
object size or position.” appears instead of
this dialog box. After the pattern causing the
error is displayed, select the pattern and
change its size or position.
1
185
Tutorial (Advanced)
Tutorial (Advanced)
■ Saving the design
The entire design is saved as a single file
(.pes).
■ Writing the design to an original
card
A design for a multi-position hoop is created
by considering the pattern in each hoop
installation position as one pattern, then
combining them.
Therefore, when this type of design is written
to an original card, one multi-position hoop
design is saved as a combination of multiple
patterns.
: This pattern is sewn when the hoop is
installed at the top installation position
(position a).
: This pattern is sewn when the hoop is
installed at the middle installation position
(position b).
: This pattern is sewn when the hoop is
installed at the bottom installation position
(position c).
Therefore, the frame installation position
sewing order for the pattern shown above is b,
a, then c.
Notes on embroidering using the multi-
position hoop
• Before embroidering your design, sew a
trial sample of the design on a scrap piece
of fabric from your design, making sure to
use the same needle and thread.
• Be sure to affix stabilizer material to the
back of the fabric and tightly stretch the
fabric within the hoop. When embroidering
on thin or stretch fabrics, use two layers of
stabilizer material. If no stabilizer material is
used, the fabric may become over-
stretched or wrinkled or the embroidery
may not be sewn correctly.
• For more ways to stabilize large designs,
refer to “Attaching stabilizer to the fabric” on
page 178
• Use the zigzag stitch for sewing the
outlines in order to prevent embroidering
outside the outlines.
• For patterns that require the hoop to be
installed at different installation positions,
design the embroidery pattern so that the
various parts of the pattern overlap in order
to prevent misalignment while
embroidering.
b Memo:
If the file size or the number of color changes
is larger than the specified number, or if one of
the patterns does not completely fit within an
embroidery area, the message “Please
change the object size or position. Do you
want to save the data anyway?” appears.
Overlap
186
Tutorial (Advanced)
■ Printing a Design Page for a multi-
position hoop
If a Design Page for a multi-position hoop is
selected, a complete image of the Design Page is
printed on the first page, followed by an image of
each design section and its sewing information
(dimensions of the embroidery, the hoop position,
the sewing color order and the stitch count), so the
number of pages depends on your design.
• If a 130 × 300 mm Design Page is selected,
the pattern is divided into sections of 130 ×
180 mm with each section printed on a
separate page.
• If a 100 × 172 mm Design Page is selected,
the pattern is divided into sections of 100 ×
100 mm with each section printed on a
separate page.
The Design Page is printed as described below.
When Actual Size is selected:
On the first page, the entire Design Page is
printed at actual size. (However, for a 130 × 300
mm Design Page, a reduced image of the
Design Page is printed.) Afterwards, the pattern
in each section of the Design Page is printed,
starting with that sewn with the first hoop
installation position, and is followed by the
sewing information for that pattern on separate
pages.
When Reduced Size is selected:
On the first page, the entire Design Page is
printed at actual size. (However, for a 130 × 300
mm Design Page, a reduced image of the
Design Page is printed.) Afterwards, the pattern
in each section of the Design Page is printed,
starting with that sewn with the first hoop
installation position, on the same page as the
sewing information for that pattern.
b Memo:
When the menu command
File
–
Print
Preview
is selected, each section of the
design is displayed as described above.
187
Managing Embroidery Design Files (Design Database)
Managing Embroidery Design Files (Design Database)
Design Database Window
1 Toolbar
Provides shortcuts for the menu commands.
2 Folder pane
Provides access to the folders on the computer
and the results of any searches that were
performed.
3 Card reading button
Reads an original card.
4 Folder content display button
The folder pane and contents pane display are
switched to the folder contents.
5 Hoop size selector
This selects the hoop size when writing a design
to an original card.
6 Card capacity indicator
Displays the selected design (displayed in the
Writing list) for the capacity of the original card.
7 Write button
The selected pattern (displayed in the Writing
list) is written to the original card.
8 Remove button
Returns the selected design (displayed in the
Writing list) to the unselected state.
9 Writing list
The list of designs to be written to the original
card is displayed.
10 Add button
The design selected in the contents pane is
displayed in the Writing list.
11 Card writing box display/non-display button
Press when writing the design to an original
card. Click this button to hide or display the
Writing list.
12 Contents pane
Displays thumbnails of all embroidery design in
the selected folder.
Starting Up Design Database
1.
Click , then select
All Programs
, then
PE-DESIGN 8
,
then
Tools
,
then
Design
Database
.
2. Click a folder in the folder pane.
→
All embroidery files in the folder are
displayed in the contents pane on the right.
5
3
6
4
2
1
7
8
9
10
11
12
b Memo:
• The displayed files have the following
extensions.
.pes, .phc, .dst, .exp, .pcs, .hus, .vip, .shv,
.jef, .sew, .csd, .xxx, .pen
• .pem files are not displayed since they cannot
be read by the machine. Import the
embroidery pattern into Layout & Editing from
Design Center, and then save it as a .pes file.
c
“Importing into Layout & Editing”
on page 152.
188
Managing Embroidery Design Files (Design Database)
Checking Embroidery Designs
Previewing files
A preview of the embroidery design can be
displayed.
Toolbar button:
1. In the folder pane, select the folder containing
the embroidery design that you want to
preview.
2. In the contents pane, select the embroidery
design.
3. Click , or click Display, then Preview.
Checking file information
Sewing information such as the file name, size,
stitch count, sewing time, color count and
modification date can be checked in the Property
dialog box. With .pes file, additional information
about the embroidery design can be viewed.
Toolbar button:
1. In the contents pane, select the embroidery
design corresponding to the information that
you want to view.
2. Click , or click Display, then Property.
→ If the Design Page was set to Custom
Size or Hoop Size is multi-position hoop
(100 x 172 mm, 130 x 300 mm), a
Property dialog box similar to the one
shown below appears.
b Memo:
Files in the .pen format cannot be previewed.
a Note:
• The displayed sewing time is an estimate.
The actual sewing time depends on the
machine model used and the specified
settings.
• The sewing time is not displayed with .pen
files.
b Memo:
• The red box in the dialog box shows the
position of the displayed pattern section.
• To display information for other hoop
positions, click or .
Non-PES files and
PES files
(version 3.0 or earlier)
PES files
(version 4.0 or later)
189
Managing Embroidery Design Files (Design Database)
Managing Embroidery Design Files (Design Database)
Opening Embroidery Designs
Opening files with Layout &
Editing
You can easily open any selected .pes file with
Layout & Editing.
1. In the folder pane, select the folder containing
the embroidery design that you want to open
in Layout & Editing.
2. In the contents pane, select the .pes file.
3. Click File, then Open in Layout & Editing.
→ The selected embroidery pattern appears
in a new Design Page.
Importing files into Layout
& Editing
You can easily import any selected embroidery
design into Layout & Editing. Files in the following
formats can be imported.
.pes, .phc, .dst, .exp, .pcs, .hus, .vip, .shv, .jef, .sew,
.csd, or .xxx
1. In the folder pane, select the folder containing
the embroidery design that you want to import
into Layout & Editing.
2. In the contents pane, select the embroidery
design.
3. Click File, then Import Into Layout & Editing.
→ The selected embroidery design appears
in the Layout & Editing window.
a Note:
Be sure to select a folder that contains .pes
files.
a Note:
Files in the .pen format cannot be imported
into Layout & Editing.
190
Managing Embroidery Design Files (Design Database)
Organizing Embroidery Designs
You can move your embroidery designs to different folders in order to organize them. In addition, you can
choose to display the embroidery designs by thumbnails or by the pattern details.
Creating new folders
New folders can be created in order to better
organize the embroidery patterns.
1. In the folder pane, on the left, select the folder.
2. Click File, then Create New Folder.
→ A New Folder appears as a sub-folder of
the one that was selected.
3. Type in the name of the new folder, and then
press the key.
→ The name of the folder changes to the one
that was typed in.
Moving/copying files to a
different folder
From Design Database, embroidery design can
easily be moved from one folder to another.
1. In the folder pane, locate the folder where you
want to move the embroidery design.
2. In the folder pane, click the folder that contains
the embroidery design.
3. Drag the embroidery design in the contents
pane to the folder you previously located in the
folder pane.
→ If the two folders are on the same drive,
the selected embroidery design is moved
to the other folder.
→ If the two folders are on separate drives,
the selected embroidery design is copied
into the other folder.
Changing file names
In the Design Database, the names of embroidery
designs can easily be changed.
Enter
b Memo:
• To copy the file from one folder to another
on the same drive, hold down the key
while dragging the embroidery design.
• To move the file from one folder to another
on different drives, hold down the
key while dragging the embroidery design.
• The file can also be removed from the
current folder (or copied) by selecting the
menu command
Edit
-
Cut
(or
Edit
-
Copy
).
Then, the file can be added to the new
folder by selecting it in the folder pane, then
selecting the menu command
Edit
-
Paste
.
a Note:
The names of embroidery designs can be
changed from Design Database only when
the sewing information (menu command
Display
–
Details
) is displayed.
c
“Changing how files are
displayed” on page 191 .
Ctrl
Shift
191
Managing Embroidery Design Files (Design Database)
Managing Embroidery Design Files (Design Database)
1. In the folder pane, select the folder containing
the embroidery design.
2. Select the embroidery design. Then click
again.
→ The name will be highlighted inside a box.
3. Type in the new name of the embroidery
design, and then press the key.
Deleting files
From Design Database, embroidery designs can
easily be deleted.
1. In the folder pane, select the folder containing
the embroidery design that you want to delete.
2. In the contents pane, select the name of the
embroidery design.
3. Press the key.
→ The file is moved to the Recycle Bin.
Changing how files are
displayed
The embroidery designs in the contents pane can
be displayed as large thumbnails or small
thumbnails, or they can be listed by their sewing
information.
1. Click Display, and then click the display
setting from the menu that appeared.
To display the embroidery designs as large
images, click Large Thumbnails or
.
To display the embroidery designs as small
images, click Small Thumbnails or
.
To display the sewing information for the
embroidery designs, click Details or
.
b Memo:
When renaming a file, the file extension
cannot be changed.
Enter
Delete
192
Managing Embroidery Design Files (Design Database)
Searching for an Embroidery Design
The Search function allows you to quickly search for the desired embroidery design (.pes, .phc, .dst, .exp, .pcs,
.hus, .vip, .shv, .jef, .sew, .csd, .xxx, or .pen) within the selected folder according to the various search
conditions that you can specify.
1. In the folder pane, select the folder.
2. Click File, then Search.
3. Specify the search conditions. Select the
check box of the search conditions to be
specified.
File Name
Select to search for files with a specific file
name. Type the file name in the box.
Format
Select to search for files with a specific format.
Select the check box beside the desired file
format.
Stitch Count
Select to search for files with the specified
number of stitches. In the boxes, type the
lower and upper limits of the range for the
number of stitches.
Color Count
Select to search for files with the specified
number of color. In the boxes, type the lower
and upper limits of the range for the number of
thread colors.
Width
Select to search for files with a specific
embroidering width. In the boxes, type the
lower and upper limits of the width range.
Height
Select to search for files with a specific
embroidering height. In the boxes, type the
lower and upper limits of the height range.
Date Modified
Select to search for files with a specific
modification date. In the boxes, type the
modification date range (from when to when).
When searching for .pes files, the following
conditions can also be specified.
Design Name
Select to search for files with a specific design
name. Type the design name in the box.
Category
Select to search for files with a specific
category. In the box, type specific characters
or the embroidery category.
Author
Select to search for files with a specific
author's name. In the box, type the characters
to be searched for.
Keywords
Select to search for files with a specific keyword.
In the box, type the characters to be searched for.
Comment
Select to search for files with a specific comment.
In the box, type the characters to be searched for.
4. Click Search.
→ A list of files matching the specified
search conditions appears.
b Memo:
Wildcard characters (“?” to represent a single
character and “ ” to represent multiple
characters) can also be used.
b Memo:
• To also search through the subfolders
(folders within the selected folder), select
the
Search subfolders
check box.
• All characters entered in the box beside
File
Name
will be considered as a single set of
characters. However, you can search for
files matching multiple words in the boxes
below
Search Conditions (only for PES
files)
by separating the words with a space.
193
Managing Embroidery Design Files (Design Database)
Managing Embroidery Design Files (Design Database)
Converting Embroidery Design Files to
Different Formats
Embroidery design files can easily be converted to a file of one of the other formats (.pes, .dst, .exp, .pcs, .hus,
.vip, .shv, .jef, .sew, .csd, or .xxx).
1. In the folder pane, select the folder containing
the embroidery design that you want to
convert.
2. In the contents pane, select the embroidery
design file.
3. Click File, then Convert Format.
4. From the Format Type selector, select the
format that.
5. Under Output To:, select whether the new file
is added to the same folder as the original file
(Same folder) or to a specified folder
(Following folder).
6. Click Convert.
→ The file is converted, and the new file is
added to the specified folder.
b Memo:
With the DST format, you can specify whether
or not the jump stitches are cut according to
the number of jump codes. Since the number
of codes differ depending on the sewing
machine being used, type or select the
appropriate value in the
Number of jumps for
trim
box. (This setting can only be specified if
the .dst format is selected.)
b Memo:
• If multiple files with different formats are
selected to be converted while
Same folder
is selected, any file with the same format as
the new one will not be converted.
However, if the files are being added to a
different folder than the original one, any file
with the same format as the new one will be
copied to the different folder, instead of
being converted.
• To change the folder where the new file will
be added, click .
b Memo:
• If the file is converted to a .pes file, the
thread colors are converted as if the file was
imported into Layout & Editing.
a Note:
Files cannot be converted to the .phc and
.pen format.
194
Managing Embroidery Design Files (Design Database)
Writing Embroidery Design Files to an
Original Card
Selected files can be written to original cards. The
embroidery patterns written to original cards can
then be transferred to an embroidery machine and
sewn.
1. Insert an original card into the USB card writer
module.
Files other than .phc files can be written.
c
“Transferring the design to an original
card” on page 17.
2. Click .
→ The Card writing box appears.
3. From the Hoop size selector, select the
appropriate size of embroidery hoop.
4. Click , and then select the folder
where the desired design file is saved.
→ All embroidery files in the selected folder
are displayed in the contents pane.
5. In the contents pane, select the embroidery
file.
6. Click or right-click the file, and then
click Add to Writing List.
→ The selected file is added to the writing
list.
b Memo:
• To hide the card writing box, click
Contents pane
(Available patterns)
Writing list
(Selected patterns)
a Note:
Do not select a hoop size larger than the
embroidery hoop that can be used with your
embroidery machine. Otherwise, the created
original card will not work correctly with the
embroidery machine.
b Memo:
A file can also be added to the writing list by
selecting it in the contents pane, then
dragging it to the writing list.
a Note:
If the pattern in the selected embroidery file
is larger than the hoop size selected in step
3 or the number of stitches or number of
colors for the pattern exceeds the maximum
for the hoop selected in step 3, that file
cannot be added to the writing list.
Only the embroidery designs displayed in
the writing list will be written to the original
card.
195
Managing Embroidery Design Files (Design Database)
Managing Embroidery Design Files (Design Database)
7. Continue until all embroidery designs that you
want to write to an original card are selected.
8. After the embroidery designs to be written to
the original card appear in the writing list, click
to write the designs to the card.
9. Click OK.
→ The embroidery design in the writing list
are written to the original card.
10. To check the embroidery design file being
written to the original card, click .
→ appears in the folder pane,
and all embroidery designs written to the
original card appear in the contents pane.
b Memo:
• To remove an embroidery design, select the
design to be removed, and then click
, or right-click the design, then click
Remove from Writing List
.
• Patterns created on a custom-sized Design
Page are written to cards split into their
various hoop sections.
c
“Memo:” on page 139.
b Memo:
• During this process, the card capacity
indicator allows you to plan which designs
you would like to save on an original card.
The space used by designs in the writing list
appears in blue.
• To rewrite the embroidery files written on
the original card, click to select
those files, and move files to the writing list
in the same manner.
a Note:
Do not remove the card or unplug the USB
cable while patterns are being written to the
card (while the LED indicator is flashing).
b Memo:
• Embroidery designs written to the original
card appear as “
Card Data
” in the contents
pane.
• To display the contents of the folder in the
contents pane, click . Switch the
display by clicking and
.
196
Managing Embroidery Design Files (Design Database)
Outputting a Catalog of Embroidery
Designs
Printing
Images of all embroidery designs in the selected
folder can be printed as a catalog.
1. In the folder pane, select the folder containing
the embroidery designs.
2. Click File, then Print Setup.
3. Under Print Layout, select whether each
design is printed on a separate page, 4
designs are printed on a page or 12 designs
are printed on a page.
4. Under Color Description, select whether the
thread colors appear as the name of the color
or as the brand and thread number.
5. Click Print.
Outputting as an HTML file
Instead of being printed, the catalog of embroidery
designs can be outputted as an HTML file.
1. In the folder pane, select the folder containing
the embroidery designs.
2. Click File, then Create HTML.
3. Select the drive and the folder, and then type
in the name of the HTML file.
4. To add a title at the top of the file and in the title
bar, type the title in the Page Title box.
5. Under Page Layout, select how the designs
appear on the page.
6. Click Save.
b Memo:
If the brand name and thread number are
long, some of the text may not be printed.
b Memo:
• If one or more embroidery designs were
selected in the contents pane, only the
selected designs are printed.
• The catalog can be printed by clicking the
menu command
File
–
Print
. The
embroidery designs are printed according
to the settings already selected in the
Print
Setup
dialog box.
197
Managing Embroidery Design Files (Design Database)
Managing Embroidery Design Files (Design Database)
Outputting as a CSV file
A .csv file containing the sewing information (file
name, dimensions, number of stitches, number of
colors, file path, file properties (.pes files only) and
the names of thread colors and thread numbers) for
selected embroidery designs can be outputted.
1. In the folder pane, select the folder containing
the embroidery designs.
2. Click File, then Create CSV.
3. Select the drive and the folder, and then type
in the name of the .csv file.
4. Click Save.
198
Managing Embroidery Design Files (Design Database)
199
Basic Programmable Stitch Creator Operations
Basic Programmable Stitch Creator Operations
Programmable Stitch Creator allows you to create and edit fill/stamp stitch patterns and motif stitch patterns,
which can be used in both Layout & Editing and Design Center. Fill/stamp stitch patterns are used with
programmable fill stitches and stamps. More decorative stitch patterns can be designed by using these
patterns.
Programmable Stitch Creator Window
1 Toolbar
Provides shortcuts for the menu commands.
2 Tool Box
Used to select and create fill/stamp and motif
stitch patterns.
(The bottom four buttons do not appear in Motif
mode.)
3 Preview window
Shows how the pattern will be sewn.
4 Design Page
The actual part of the work area that can be saved.
5 Work area
Creating Fill/Stamp Stitch Pattern
Existing programmable stitch patterns can be edited to create new patterns.
4
2
1
5
3
Step 1 Opening a fill/stamp stitch pattern
Step 2 Drawing lines to edit the fill/stamp stitch pattern
Step 3 Applying embossing/engraving effects to the fill/stamp stitch pattern
Step 4 Saving the edited fill/stamp stitch pattern
Step 5 Using the edited fill/stamp stitch patterns in Layout & Editing
200
Basic Programmable Stitch Creator Operations
Step 1 Opening a fill/stamp stitch
pattern
First, we will open the fill/stamp stitch pattern to be
edited. In this example, we will use pattern wave1.pas.
Click , then select All Programs, then
PE-DESIGN 8, then Tools, then
Programmable Stitch Creator.
Click File, then Open.
Select the pattern file wave1.pas in the
Pattern folder where PE-DESIGN was
installed. (For example, clicking the drive
where PE-DESIGN was installed, then
Program Files, then Brother, then
PE-DESIGN 8, then Pattern)
Click Open, or double-click the files icon.
Step 2
Drawing lines to edit the fill/
stamp stitch pattern
Now, we are going to draw lines between the
displayed ones using the Line tool of the Tool Box.
Click .
Click in the Design Page to specify points 1
through 4.
Double-click the Design Page to specify point
5 (end point).
Repeat the previous operations to add
another wave between the first and second
waves on the right side.
b Memo:
For this example, we will use the grid setting
Medium
with which the pattern was saved. For
more information on the grid settings, refer to
“Changing the grid settings” on page 215.
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
3
4
b Memo:
• The horizontal and vertical lines that you
draw on the work area always follow the
grid. The points that you create by clicking
are inserted at the intersection of the
horizontal and vertical grid lines, enabling
you to draw diagonal lines as well.
Therefore, regardless of where you click, a
point will automatically be inserted at the
nearest intersection.
• To remove the last point that was entered,
click the right mouse button.
c
“Creating a Pattern in Fill/Stamp
Mode” on page 208.
3
5
4
201
Basic Programmable Stitch Creator Operations
Basic Programmable Stitch Creator Operations
Step 3
Applying embossing/engraving
effects to the fill/stamp stitch pattern
By applying embossing or engraving effects to a
pattern used as a programmable fill stitch or a
stamp, an embossed or engraved finish can be
created in the embroidery pattern.
In order to do this, the lines of the pattern must
form closed regions. In our example, the lines do
not form closed regions, so we will need to add
enclosing lines.
Click , click in the Design Page to specify
point 1, and then double-click the Design
Page to specify point 2.
Next, click in the Design Page to specify point
3, and then double-click the Design Page to
specify point 4.
→ Lines are drawn along the top and bottom
edges of the Design Page.
Click (Region (engrave)), then click the
first and fourth wave regions.
→ These regions appear in red and will be
sewn with short stitches to give the effect
of engraving.
Click (Region (emboss)), then click the
second and fifth wave regions.
→ This region appears in blue and will be
sewn with no dropped stitches to give the
effect of embossing.
Step 4 Saving the edited fill/stamp
stitch pattern
The edited pattern can be saved. Fill/stamp stitch
patterns are saved in the .pas format.
Click File, then Save As.
Select the drive and the folder, and then type
in the file name.
Click Save.
Click File, then Exit.
1
1
2
43
2
3
1
2
3
202
Basic Programmable Stitch Creator Operations
Step 5
Using the edited fill/stamp stitch
patterns in Layout & Editing
Start up Layout & Editing.
Select an embroidery pattern.
From the Region sew type selector, select
Prog. Fill Stitch.
Click
Sew
, then
Sewing Attribute Setting
.
c
“Layout & Editing Window” on page 47.
Click beside Programmable fill.
Select the drive and folder where the pattern
was saved in Step 4.
Click the edited fill/stamp stitch pattern, and
then click OK.
→ The pattern is applied to the inside
regions of the embroidery pattern.
If necessary, change any other sewing
attributes.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
b Memo:
• A fill/stamp stitch pattern can also be
applied as a stamp by using .
c
“Applying and editing Stamps” on
page 114.
• For best results, refer to “Notes on
programmable fill stitches and stamps” on
page 109.
8
203
Basic Programmable Stitch Creator Operations
Basic Programmable Stitch Creator Operations
Creating Motif Stitch Pattern
Now, we will create a new motif stitch pattern. Motif stitch patterns are created in Motif mode.
Step 1 Enter motif mode
Start up Programmable Stitch Creator.
Click Mode, then Motif.
→ The application enters Motif mode.
Step 2
Shaping a single line to create motif
stitch pattern
In Motif mode, you can create original patterns by
changing the shape of a single line. These patterns
can be applied in line sewing and region sewing in
Layout & Editing, and region sewing in Design
Center.
Click , then click the base line between
the start point (blue square) and end point (red
square).
→ A block square appears.
Drag the point.
The line that moves turns green when moving
a point.
Step 1 Enter motif mode
Step 2 Shaping a single line to create motif stitch pattern
Step 3 Saving the created motif stitch pattern
Step 4 Using the edited motif stitch pattern in Layout & Editing
1
2
1
2
204
Basic Programmable Stitch Creator Operations
Step 3 Saving the created motif
stitch pattern
The created pattern can be saved. Motif stitch
patterns are saved in the .pmf format.
These patterns are saved in the same way that fill/
stamp stitch patterns are saved.
c
“Saving the edited fill/stamp stitch pattern”
on page 201.
Step 4
Using the edited motif stitch
pattern in Layout & Editing
Start up Layout & Editing.
Select an embroidery pattern.
From the Line sew type selector, select Motif
Stitch.
Click
Sew
, then
Sewing Attribute Setting
.
c
“Layout & Editing Window” on page 47.
Click beside Pattern.
Select the drive and folder where the pattern
was saved in Step 4.
Click the created motif stitch pattern, and then
click OK.
→ The pattern is applied to the outlines of
the embroidery pattern.
If necessary, change any other sewing
attributes.
b Memo:
• To move the point horizontally or vertically,
hold down the key while dragging it.
• Pressing the arrow keys moves the
selected point one grid mark in the direction
of the arrow on the key. If the grid is not
displayed, the pattern moves a distance
smaller than the smallest grid interval in the
direction of the arrow on the key.
• To delete a selected point, press the
key.
Shift
Delete
1
2
3
4
b Memo:
A motif stitch pattern can be used when the
motif stitch, piping stitch or stippling stitch has
been selected as the sew type of a region.
5
6
7
8
205
Creating Custom Stitch Patterns (Programmable Stitch Creator)
Creating Custom Stitch Patterns (Programmable Stitch Creator)
This section provides detailed descriptions on the various operations, settings and precautions for
Programmable Stitch Creator. In addition, many useful functions are introduced.
Programmable Stitch Creator is an application for creating, editing and saving stitch patterns that can be used
for programmable fill stitch or motif stitch sewing. The following two types of patterns can be created in their
corresponding mode.
Fill/stamp stitch patterns
• These patterns can be used as stamp patterns and for sewing with the programmable fill stitch in
Layout & Editing or Design Center.
• These patterns can be created with a single line or with multiple lines. In addition, these patterns can
be used to create an embossing/engraving effect in sewn regions.
• These patterns are created in Fill/Stamp mode.
Motif stitch patterns
• These patterns can be used for sewing lines with the motif stitch and for sewing regions with the motif
stitch, piping stitch and stippling stitch in Layout & Editing or Design Center.
• These patterns are created with a single line, which gives the look of a single-stroke drawing, and they
are used for decorative machine sewing.
• These patterns are created in Motif mode.
engrave emboss
206
Creating Custom Stitch Patterns (Programmable Stitch Creator)
Opening a Pattern File
A previously saved pattern file can be opened to be
edited.
Toolbar button:
1. Click , or click File, then Open.
2. Select the drive and the folder.
3. To open a file, select it, and then click Open,
or double-click the file’s icon.
→ The contents of the selected file appear in
the work area.
Opening an image in the
background
You can open a background image that can be used
as a guide to draw a new fill/stamp and motif stitch
pattern. There are many different types of files that
can be opened.
c
“Image file formats” on page 19.
1. Click File, then Template Open.
2. Select the drive, the folder and the desired file.
3. Click Open to open the file.
→ The image fills the work area.
a Note:
To open a fill/stamp stitch pattern, be sure to
select a
folder that contains .pas files. To
open a motif stitch pattern, be sure to select
a folder that contains .pmf files.
b Memo:
• To view the data in the selected folder as
thumbnails in the
Browse
dialog box, click
Browse
.
• A green arrow through the middle of the
stitch pattern indicates motif stitch patterns
(.pmf). Otherwise, the data is a fill/stamp
stitch pattern (.pas).
• Stamps are identified by the red- (engraving
effect sewn with the fill stitch) and blue-filled
areas (embossing effect sewn with satin
stitching).
b Memo:
The mode will automatically change to match
that of the selected pattern (
Fill/Stamp
for
.pas files or
Motif
for .pmf files).
a Note:
Only one image can be added to the work
area. If you try to display a different image, it
will replace the previous one.
207
Creating Custom Stitch Patterns (Programmable Stitch Creator)
Creating Custom Stitch Patterns (Programmable Stitch Creator)
Creating a New Pattern
You can begin with a blank work area in order to
design a new stitch pattern.
Toolbar button:
1. Click , or click File, then New.
→ A new work area appears.
Selecting the type of
pattern to be created
Enter the appropriate mode according to the type of
pattern to be created.
1. To enter Fill/Stamp mode, click Mode, then
Fill/Stamp.
To enter Motif mode, click Mode, then Motif.
→ A blank work area appears in the selected
mode.
■ Fill/Stamp mode
In Fill/Stamp mode, you can make a pattern out of a
single line or sets of lines, and you can then choose
to fill the areas enclosed by the lines to create an
embossing/engraving effect.
The Line tool in the Tool Box allows you to draw the
lines of a fill stitch pattern or a stamp, and the
Region (engrave), the Region (emboss) and the
Region (reset) tools allow you to fill and edit the
enclosed areas of the stitch or stamp that you draw.
The sewing method for a programmable fill stitch is
different from the regular fill stitch, where the thread
is constantly sewn in a set direction. Instead, the
pattern will be sewn in such a way that the needle
drops directly over the created pattern.
■ Motif mode
In Motif mode, you can create motif stitch patterns
by changing the shape of a single line.
A green arrow appears at the right center edge of
the work area, showing the direction that the pattern
(stitch) will be sewn.
A single pink line appears along with the green
arrow. This line indicates the base for the motif
stitch, which can be altered by inserting points with
the Edit Point tool, and then moving them to form
custom designs.
The blue square at the left edge of the work area
indicates the start point of that line and the red
square at the right edge indicates the end point of
the stitch.
The start and end points cannot be deleted, and
they must be aligned vertically. Therefore, if you
move one point up or down, the other point will
automatically move in the same direction.
Example of a pattern selected
for a programmable fill stitch
Example of a pattern
Line sewing
Region sewing
208
Creating Custom Stitch Patterns (Programmable Stitch Creator)
Viewing the Pattern While Creating It
You can display the Preview window to view a repeating image of the pattern as you create it.
1. If the Preview window isn’t displayed, click
Display, then Preview.
The Preview window for the selected Mode
setting appears, as shown in the examples
below.
The image in the Preview window is updated
as you enter the changes in the work area.
2. To close the Preview window, click its
button, or click the menu command Display
Preview to remove the check mark.
Creating a Pattern in Fill/Stamp Mode
The Line tool allows you to draw broken lines to create your fill/stamp stitch pattern.
The horizontal and vertical lines that you draw on the work area always follow the grid. The points that you
create by clicking the mouse button are inserted at the intersection of the horizontal and vertical lines of the
grid, enabling you to draw diagonal lines as well. Regardless of where you click, a point will automatically be
inserted at the nearest intersection.
Depending on the pattern that you want to draw, you may need to select a grid of a different size. In addition,
by selecting None, the point will no longer be inserted at the nearest intersection, allowing you to create curved
patterns. For details on the grids and adjusting them, refer to “Changing the grid settings” on page 215.
1. Click .
2. Click in the work area to specify the start point
1.
And then, click in the work area to specify the
next point 2.
3. Continue clicking to specify every point, and
then double-click the last point, or click the last
point and press the key.
4. Repeat the entire procedure until the fill/stamp
stitch pattern is completed.
Fill/Stamp mode
Motif mode
b Memo:
To remove the last point that was entered,
click the right mouse button, or press the
key.
2
1
BackSpace
Enter
209
Creating Custom Stitch Patterns (Programmable Stitch Creator)
Creating Custom Stitch Patterns (Programmable Stitch Creator)
Editing a Pattern in Fill/Stamp Mode
Selecting patterns
1. Click .
2. Click the pattern that you want to select.
→ Handles appear around the pattern to show
that it is selected.
3. To select an additional pattern, hold down the
key and click the other pattern.
Moving patterns
1. Move the pointer over a selected pattern(s).
2. Drag the pattern(s) to the desired location.
Scaling patterns
1. Move the pointer over one of the handles of a
selected pattern(s).
2. Drag the handle to adjust the selected
pattern(s) to the desired size.
Reshaping a fill/stamp
stitch patterns
The points that you move or insert are positioned at
the intersection of the horizontal and vertical lines of
the grid. Regardless of where you drag a point to or
insert a point on the line, it will automatically be
positioned at the nearest intersection.
Depending on the stitch that you want to create, you
may need to select a grid of a different size. For
details on the grids and adjusting them, refer to
“Changing the grid settings” on page 215.
1. Click .
b Memo:
• You can also select patterns by dragging
the pointer across the pattern.
• If you selected patterns that you did not
want, click a blank area of the work area to
deselect all patterns, and start again.
b Memo:
• To move the pattern horizontally or
vertically, hold down the key while
dragging it.
• Pressing the arrow keys moves the
selected pattern one grid mark in the
direction of the arrow on the key.
Ctrl
Shift
b Memo:
• If the key is held down while a handle
is dragged, the pattern is enlarged or
reduced from the center of the pattern.
• To flip the selected pattern(s) along a
horizontal axis, click , or click
Edit
, then
Mirror
, then
Horizontal
.
To flip the selected pattern(s) along a
vertical axis, click , or click
Edit
, then
Mirror
, then
Vertical
.
• To rotate the selected pattern(s), click ,
or click
Edit
, then
Rotate
, then drag the
rotation handle.
• Using toolbar buttons and menu commands
other than those mentioned above, selected
patterns can be edited in other ways, for
example, duplicated or deleted.
c
“Menus/Tools” of “Programmable
Stitch Creator” on page 256.
Shift
210
Creating Custom Stitch Patterns (Programmable Stitch Creator)
2. Click the broken line.
→ The points in the broken line appear as
small white squares.
3. To edit a point, click the point to select it.
→ The selected point appears as a small
black square.
• To move the point, drag it to the new
location.
→ All of the selected points move in the
same direction.
• To insert a point, click the line to add a new
point.
→ A new point appears selected (as a small
black square).
• To delete the point, click Edit, then Delete,
or press the key to remove the
point.
b Memo:
You can only select one broken line at a time.
b Memo:
If a line is composed of two points and you
delete one of them, the entire line is deleted.
b Memo:
• To select multiple points, hold down the
key while clicking the points, or
dragging the pointer over the points.
• Hold down the key while pressing the
key or key. The selection
direction changes to the end or start point.
• Hold down the key while dragging the
points. The points are moved horizontally or
vertically.
• Press an arrow key. The points move in the
direction of the arrow on the key.
Delete
Ctrl
Ctrl
Shift
211
Creating Custom Stitch Patterns (Programmable Stitch Creator)
Creating Custom Stitch Patterns (Programmable Stitch Creator)
Creating Embossing/Engraving Effects in
Fill/Stamp Mode
In Fill/Stamp mode, an embossed or engraved effect can be created by specifying the sew type of an enclosed
region.
1. Open an existing fill/stamp pattern file (.pas
file) or draw a new pattern with the Line tool in
the Fill/Stamp mode.
2. To create an engraving effect, click
(Region (engrave)).
3. Click each region.
→ The regions appear in red, which is the
color for the tool.
4. To create an embossing effect, click
(Region (emboss)).
5. Click each region.
→ The regions appear in blue, which is the
color for the tool, and will be sewn with
stitching that appears like satin stitching.
6. To remove the embossing/engraving effect
applied to a region, click (Region
(reset)).
7. Click each region where you want to remove
the engraving or embossing setting.
→ The region appears in white, which is the
color for the tool, and will be sewn in the
direction set for the base stitch.
a Note:
In order to apply the region settings
(embossing/engraving effects), make sure
that the lines of the pattern form an enclosed
area.
The edge of the work area does enclose
regions. In order to use the edge of the work
area as a limit for regions, lines must be
drawn over it first.
b Memo:
This type of region will be sewn with the fill
stitch set to a pitch of 2.0 mm (0.08 inches)
and a frequency of 30%, and the needle drop
point will be set on the outline.
a Note:
• If you edit stitch lines after a region has
been filled, make sure that the lines still
form a region, otherwise the embossing/
engraving effects are canceled.
• .pas files with region settings applied
cannot be used with versions of the
software earlier than version 6, but .pas
files created with an earlier version can be
used as a base to create stamp files.
212
Creating Custom Stitch Patterns (Programmable Stitch Creator)
Creating a Pattern in Motif Mode
In Motif mode, patterns are created by inserting points on the base line of the motif stitch, then moving them
in order to change the shape of the stitch and give it the look of a single-stroke drawing.
The points you move or insert are positioned at the intersection of the horizontal and vertical lines of the grid.
Regardless of where you drag a point to or insert a point on the line, it will automatically be positioned at the
nearest intersection.
Depending on the stitch you want to create, you may need to select a grid of a different size. For details on the
grids and adjusting them, refer to “Changing the grid settings” on page 215.
1. Click .
2. Click the base line between the start point
(blue square) and end point (red square).
→ A new point appears selected (as a small
black square). The new point can be
edited.
3. Drag the point.
→ The stitch line moves with the newly
created point.
4. Repeat steps 2. and 3. until the motif stitch
pattern is completed.
b Memo:
• To move the point horizontally or vertically,
hold down the key while dragging it.
• Pressing the arrow keys moves the
selected point one grid mark in the direction
of the arrow on the key.
• To delete a selected point, press the
key.
b Memo:
• If you move the start point (blue square) or
the end point (red square), the other point
will automatically move in the same
direction.
• The start and end points cannot be moved
closer together than a certain fixed distance.
Shift
Delete
213
Creating Custom Stitch Patterns (Programmable Stitch Creator)
Creating Custom Stitch Patterns (Programmable Stitch Creator)
Editing a Pattern in Motif Mode
After creating a pattern, or after opening an existing motif file, you may want to change its shape or position.
To do so, you can proceed in the same way as described above, but in addition, you can select and move or
delete several points at the same time.
Moving and deleting
several points at a time
1. Click on the Tool Box.
2. Click the point.
→ The selected point appears as a small
black square. The start point and end
point appear as filled squares in their
corresponding colors.
To select multiple points, hold down the
key while clicking the points, or dragging the
pointer over the points.
3. Edit the points.
• To move the points, drag them to the
desired location.
→ All of the selected points move in the
same direction.
• To delete the selected points, press the
key.
→ All of the selected points are deleted.
Scaling patterns
1. Click on the Tool Box.
→ The motif stitch is selected.
2. Move the pointer over one of the handles of
the pattern.
3. Drag the handle to adjust the selected
pattern(s) to the desired size.
b Memo:
Hold down the key while pressing the
key or key. The selection
direction changes to the end or start point.
a Note:
The start point (blue square) and end point
(red square) can not be deleted.
Ctrl
Ctrl
Delete
b Memo:
If the key is held down while a handle is
dragged, the pattern is enlarged or reduced
from the center of the pattern.
b Memo:
To flip the pattern along a horizontal axis, click
, or click
Edit
, then
Mirror
, then
Horizontal
.
To flip the pattern along a vertical axis, click
, or click
Edit
, then
Mirror
, then
Vertical
.
Shift
214
Creating Custom Stitch Patterns (Programmable Stitch Creator)
Saving Patterns
Overwriting
Once the pattern has been saved, changes can
easily be saved so that the latest version can be
retrieved later.
Toolbar button:
1. Click , or click File, then Save.
→ The file is saved.
Saving with a new name
The current file can be saved with a different file
name in order to keep the original unchanged or to
keep various versions of the same image or pattern.
The files are saved as.pas files in Fill/Stamp mode,
and as .pmf files in Motif mode.
1. Click File, then Save As.
2. Select the drive and the folder, and then type
in the file name.
3. Click Save to save the pattern.
215
Creating Custom Stitch Patterns (Programmable Stitch Creator)
Creating Custom Stitch Patterns (Programmable Stitch Creator)
Changing the Settings
Changing the grid settings
The line spacing in the grid displayed in the work
area can be adjusted.
1. Click Display, then Grid.
→ A submenu showing the current grid
setting appears.
2. Click the grid setting that you need for the
stitch pattern that you are creating or editing.
The horizontal and vertical lines that you draw in the
work area always follow the grid. The points you
create by clicking in the work area are inserted at the
intersection of the horizontal and vertical lines of the
grid, enabling you to draw diagonal lines as well.
Regardless of where you click, a point will
automatically be inserted at the nearest intersection.
Select a different grid size according to the type of
stitch that you want to draw. Select a narrower grid
for drawing finer details or to give a curved or
circular appearance to your stitch lines, and select a
wider grid if you want to draw a simpler stitch
pattern.
Changing the display of the
background image
The template image that remains in the work area
can be displayed or hidden, or a faded copy of the
image can be displayed.
1. Click Display, then Template, and then select
the desired setting.
• To display the template image, click On
(100%).
• To display a faded copy of the image, click
the desired density (75%, 50% or 25%).
• To hide the template image, click Off.
b Memo:
• This function is not available if no template
image has been imported into the work area.
• Press the shortcut key ( ) to switch
between displaying the image (
On (100%)
)
to displaying it faded at each density (
75%
,
50%
and
25%
) to hiding the image (
Off
).
F6
216
Creating Custom Stitch Patterns (Programmable Stitch Creator)
217
Basic Font Creator Operations
Basic Font Creator Operations
Font Creator Window
1 Toolbar
Provides shortcuts for the menu commands.
2 Select Character bar
Allows characters from created fonts to be selected.
3 Tool Box
Used to select and create font pattern.
4 Preview window
Shows how the stitch pattern will be sewn.
5 Design Page
The actual part of the work area that can be saved.
6 Guidelines (fixed)
The distance between the two guidelines becomes the height of the font created.
7 Guidelines (movable)
These guidelines can be moved according to the shape of the created font. The distance between the two
red guidelines becomes the width of the font created. The three blue guidelines are positioning lines for
accent positions, the height of small characters, and the bottom edge of small characters.
8 Work area
6
3
8
4
2
1
5
7
7
218
Basic Font Creator Operations
The Design Page
guidelines
The standard guidelines for creating fonts are
shown in the Design Pages. The contents of each of
the guidelines are as shown below.
(A) Base Line
This line is the reference for positioning the
font character.
Normally, from this line to the Capital Line will
be the font height. This line cannot be moved.
(B) Capital Line
The font’s standard height will be from the
Base Line to this line. This line cannot be
moved.
(C) Mean Line
When in lower case, the standard height of the
font will be from the Base Line to this line. It
can be moved by dragging the triangle icon on
the right edge.
(D) Descender Line
This line is the standard for characters with
parts that hang down (descenders) such as
“g” and “y”. It can be moved by dragging the
triangle icon on the right edge.
(E) Ascender Line
This line is the standard for characters with
parts that extended above (ascenders) such
as the accent mark. It can be moved by
dragging the triangle icon on the right edge.
(F/G) Set Line
This line will be the font width. The font width
can be adjusted by dragging the triangle icon
on the bottom edge.
(E) Ascender Line
(B) Capital Line
(C) Mean Line
(A) Base Line
(D) Descender Line
(G) Set Line
(F) Set Line
Triangle icon
b Memo:
• The heights and widths specified for the
Base Line
,
Capital Line
and
Set Lines
are
the reference mask for creating the font
character.
• When characters created with Font Creator
are imported into Layout & Editing, the
width and height of the characters will be in
the following area.
• Character height: from Base Line (A) to
Capital Line (B)
• Character width: from Set Line (F) to
Set Line (G)
• In order to align the height of the characters,
the
Ascender Line
,
Mean Line
and
Descender Line
appear the same with all
characters. Therefore, if the height of any of
these lines is changed, the setting is
maintained, even when a different character
is selected to be edited.
• The widths of the
Set Lines
can be set
separately for each character.
219
Basic Font Creator Operations
Basic Font Creator Operations
Manually Creating Custom Font
With Font Creator, custom font characters that can be used in Layout & Editing can be created and edited.
Using these custom characters, original embroidery patterns can be created.
Step 1 Opening a background
image
In order to create the custom font, we will open an
image in the background. For this example, we
will use the provided background image to create
a pattern for the letter “T”.
Click , then select All Programs, then PE-
DESIGN 8, then Tools, then Font Creator.
Click File, then Template Open, then from
File.
Import the Capital_T.bmp.
Select the file Capital_T.bmp by clicking the
documents folder (My documents), then PE-
DESIGN8, then Sample, then Font Creator,
then Font Template.
Move the character so that the top aligns with
the Capital Line. To adjust the height of the
character, drag a handle to adjust the height
between the Capital Line and the Base Line.
Step 1 Opening a background image
Step 2 Creating a font character pattern
Step 3 Creating other font character patterns
Step 4 Save the font character pattern
Step 5 Creating an embroidery pattern using the created font characters
1
2
3
b Memo:
The
Base Line
,
Capital Line
and
Set Lines
,
which appear as red lines in the sample
bitmap, have been added as guidelines so the
background image can be positioned more
easily.
4
Capital Line
Handles
Base Line
220
Basic Font Creator Operations
Step 2 Creating a font character
pattern
Select the character to be created.
Click the Select character button, and then
select the character to be created. For this
example, select “T”.
Click , then .
Click in the Design Page to specify points 1
(start point) through 4.
Click , then .
And then click point 5 through 7.
b Memo:
If the handles have disappeared, right-click
the image, and then click
Modify Template
in
the menu that appeared.
b Memo:
The character must be registered in the
Select Character
table in order for the
created font to be used in Layout & Editing.
c
“Entering text/Small text” on
page 80.
b Memo:
The template image that remains in the work
area can be displayed or hidden, or a faded
copy of the image can be displayed. For this
example, click
Display-Display Template
,
then select
25%
.
1
b Memo:
Five buttons appear when is clicked.
: Straight block-type pattern
: Curved block-type pattern
: Semi-automatically created straight
block-type pattern
: Running-type pattern
: Feed-type pattern
2
24
3
1
3
6
7
5
221
Basic Font Creator Operations
Basic Font Creator Operations
Click , then .
And then click points 8 through 10.
Click , then .
Click , then .
And then click points 11 through 12.
Double-click point 13 (the last point of the
entire pattern), or click point 13 and press the
key.
Click , then drag Set Line to adjust the
character width.
Step 3 Creating other font
character patterns
Next, we will create another font character
pattern. For this example, we will create a pattern
for the letter “g”.
Import file Small_g.bmp in the same way that
“T” was imported.
Click the Select Character button, and then
select the character to be created. For this
example, select “g”.
b Memo:
By clicking at this point, overlapping
stitching can be prevented.
4
9
8
10
5
6
11
12
7
Enter
13
b Memo:
To remove the last point that was entered,
click the right mouse button, or press the
key.
BackSpace
8
Set Line Set Line
1
2
222
Basic Font Creator Operations
Adjust the character size and position in the
same way that “T” was adjusted.
Drag the triangle icons to move the blue
reference lines so that they are aligned with
the top and bottom of the character.
Click , then .
And then click points 1 though 7.
Click , then .
And then click points 8 though 24.
Click , then .
And then click points 25 and 26.
Click , then .
And then click points 27 though 29.
3
Descender
Line
Mean Line
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
5
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1516
18
17
20
19
22
21
23
24
6
25
26
7
27
28
29
223
Basic Font Creator Operations
Basic Font Creator Operations
Click , then .
And then click points 30 though 34.
Click , then .
Next, click points 35 though 44, and then
double-click point 45 (end point), or click point
45 and press the key.
Drag Set Line to adjust the character width.
Step 4 Save the font character
pattern
Click File, then Save.
Select the MyFont folder in the folder where
PE-DESIGN was installed. (For example,
clicking the drive where PE-DESIGN was
installed, then Program Files, then Brother,
then PE-DESIGN 8, then MyFont) And then
type in the file name. For this example, type in
the name “My font1”.
Click Save.
8
34
33
32
31
30
9
Enter
35
37
36
39
38
41
40
43
4544
42
10
Set Line
a Note:
Save the font created in the location below.
The font will not be usable in the Layout &
Editing if it’s stored in a different folder.
For example, (Drive where PE-DESIGN
was installed) \Program Files\Brother\
PE-DESIGN 8\MyFont.
1
2
224
Basic Font Creator Operations
Step 5
Creating an embroidery pattern
using the created font characters
The created font characters can be used in Layout
& Editing.
Start up Layout & Editing.
Click , then .
Click in the Font selector, and then select
“My font1”.
Click in the Design Page.
Input the text, and then click OK.
→ The text is displayed in the Design Page.
c
“Adding Text” on page 80.
b Memo:
If Layout & Editing is already started, exit it,
and then start it again. The new font is
detected when the application starts up.
1
2
3
Fonts created in Font Creator
appear with the icon in front of
the font name.
4
225
Creating Custom Fonts (Font Creator)
Creating Custom Fonts (Font Creator)
This section provides detailed descriptions on the various operations, settings and precautions for Font
Creator. In addition, many useful functions are introduced.
Opening a File
Creating a new font
You can begin with a blank work area to design a
new font.
Toolbar button:
1. Click , or click File, then New.
→ A new work area appears.
Opening a font file
A previously created or saved font file can be
opened to be edited.
Toolbar button:
1. Click , or click File, then Open.
2. Select the MyFont folder in the folder where
PE-DESIGN was installed. (For example,
clicking the drive where PE-DESIGN was
installed, then Program Files, then Brother,
then PE-DESIGN 8, then MyFont)
3. To open a file, select it, and then click Open,
or double-click the file’s icon.
→ The contents of the selected file appear in
the work area.
226
Creating Custom Fonts (Font Creator)
Selecting a Character and Preparing the
Template
Selecting the character to
be created
The character to be created can be selected.
1. Click the Select Character button in the
Select Character bar.
2. In the Select Character dialog box that
appeared, click the character to be created.
If the desired character does not appear in the
list, a character can be selected by typing it in
the text box at the bottom of the dialog box,
then pressing the key.
■ Adding/deleting registered
characters
As a default, space, numbers (0 to 9), uppercase
letters (A to Z) and lowercase letters (a to z) are
registered in the Select Character dialog box.
Characters such as “?” and “!” can be added, and
unnecessary characters can be deleted. A
maximum of 1,024 characters can be registered
with each custom font.
1. Click File, then Add/Remove Letters.
2. From the keyboard, enter the character to be
registered.
→ The entered character appears in the box
under Directly type in text.
3. Click Add.
→ The entered character is added to the
character list.
If the character is already registered or if the
same character is entered multiple times, an
error message appears. Only characters that
have not yet been registered can be
registered.
4. To delete a registered character, select the
character, and then click Remove.
The box is selected in red. Each click of the
character switches between selecting and
deselecting it.
b Memo:
• Characters where pattern has already been
created appear with a blue background.
• The blank box in the upper-left corner is a
space. Click this box to select a space.
a Note:
If any part of the character pattern extends
off the Design Page when a different
character is selected, a message appears.
Before selecting a different character, edit
the character pattern so that no part extends
off the Design Page.
Enter
227
Creating Custom Fonts (Font Creator)
Creating Custom Fonts (Font Creator)
5. When the settings can be applied, click OK.
Opening an image in the
background
Existing image data or a TrueType font character
can be displayed in the Design Page to be used as
a template. Open an image of the selected
character to use it as a background image.
■ Opening a template (image file)
There are many different types of files that can be
opened.
c
“Image file formats” on page 19.
1. Click File, then Template Open, then from
File.
2. Select the drive, the folder and the desired file.
3. Click Open to open the file.
→ The image fills the work area.
■
Opening a template (TrueType font)
TrueType fonts installed on your computer can
be opened to be used as a template.
1. Click File, then Template Open, then Select
TrueType Font.
2.
From the
Font
selector, select the font. From the
Style
selector, select the character style.
3. Click OK.
→ The character selected in the Select
Character dialog box appears in the work
area.
b Memo:
• To not register the changes, click
Cancel
.
• If a character is registered even though a
font has not been created, the information
for the registered character is saved in a
font file.
b Memo:
• Only one image can be added to the work
area. If you try to display a different image,
it will replace the previous one.
• The display density of the background
image can be changed.
c
“Changing the display of the
background image” on page 235.
• If the background image is displayed, the
information for the background image will
be saved with the font file. The next time
that the font file is opened, the background
image is displayed.
b Memo:
The background image can be dragged to
move it, or a handle can be dragged to change
the size of the image. If the handles have
disappeared, right-click the image, and then
click
Modify Template
in the menu that
appeared.
228
Creating Custom Fonts (Font Creator)
• While working on a character in a font, the
same TrueType font appears until a
different template is selected for the
background. Each time a different
character is selected in the Select
Character dialog box, the template of the
character in the same TrueType font
appears.
• If the character selected in the Select
Character dialog box is not available in the
TrueType font, “?” appears as the
template.
b Memo:
• If a TrueType font was selected as the
template, it cannot be moved or resized.
And in this case, it can automatically be
converted to a font character pattern.
c
“Automatically converting
TrueType fonts” on page 229.
• In addition, the character cannot be drawn
with the semi-automatic block-type punch
tool.
229
Creating Custom Fonts (Font Creator)
Creating Custom Fonts (Font Creator)
Creating a Font Character Pattern
Creating patterns using the
Manual Punch tools
Using the Manual Punch tools, create the font
character pattern.
A background image can be displayed so that the
font character pattern can be created more easily.
c
“Opening an image in the background” on
page 227.
Use on the Tool Box to create the patterns.
When this button is clicked, the following five
buttons appear.
: This is used for creating straight block-type
punching patterns (region sewing).
(Shortcut key: )
: This is used for creating curved block-type
punching patterns (region sewing).
(Shortcut key: )
: This is used for semi-automatically creating
straight block-type punching patterns.
By semi-automatically tracing, points can be
specified along the lines of a template.
(Shortcut key: )
: This is used for creating running-type
punching patterns (line sewing).
(Shortcut key: )
: This is used for creating feed-type punching
patterns (jump stitches).
(Shortcut key: )
c
“Manually Creating Custom Font” on
page 219.
Automatically converting
TrueType fonts
If a TrueType font is used as a template, it can
simply be converted into font character patterns.
1. Open the TrueType font to be used as a
template.
c
“Opening a template (TrueType font)” on
page 227.
2. Click Sew, then Convert TrueType Font to
Data.
→ A font character pattern is created from
the background image.
Z
X
C
V
B
b Memo:
• When entering points, you can switch
between the various tools. This is very easy
if the shortcut keys are used.
• A template image is needed in order to use
the semi-automatic block-type punch tool. If
there is no image, this tool will create a
punching pattern like the straight block-type
punch tool. In addition, this tool cannot be
used if a TrueType font is used as the
template.
• Once the pattern is drawn, you can still
transform straight block-type patterns into
curved block-type patterns and vice versa.
For details, refer to “Editing points” on
page 231.
230
Creating Custom Fonts (Font Creator)
Editing Font Character Patterns
Selecting patterns
1. Click on the Tool Box.
2. Click the pattern.
→ Handles appear around the pattern to show
that it is selected.
3. To select an additional pattern, hold down the
key and click the other pattern.
Moving patterns
1. Move the pointer over a selected pattern(s).
2. Drag the pattern(s) to the desired location.
Scaling patterns
1. Move the pointer over one of the handles of a
selected pattern(s).
2. Drag the handle to adjust the selected
pattern(s) to the desired size.
b Memo:
• You can also select patterns by dragging the
pointer across the pattern.
• If you selected patterns that you did not
want, click a blank area of the work area to
deselect all patterns, and start again.
Ctrl
b Memo:
• To move the pattern horizontally or
vertically, hold down the key while
dragging it.
• Pressing the arrow keys moves the selected
pattern one grid mark in the direction of the
arrow on the key. If the grid is not displayed,
the pattern moves a distance smaller than
the smallest grid interval in the direction of
the arrow on the key.
• Holding down the arrow key for the desired
direction continues moving the outline in that
direction.
b Memo:
• If the key is held down while a
handle is dragged, the pattern is enlarged
or reduced from the center of the pattern.
• To flip the selected pattern(s) along a
horizontal axis, click
Edit
, then
Mirror
, then
Horizontal
.
To flip the selected pattern(s) along a
vertical axis, click
Edit
, then
Mirror
, then
Vertical
.
• To rotate the selected pattern(s), click
Edit
,
then
Rotate
, then drag the rotation handle.
• Using toolbar buttons and menu commands
other than those mentioned above, selected
patterns can be edited in other ways, for
example, duplicated or deleted.
c
“Menus/Tools” of “Font Creator”
on page 259.
Shift
Shift
231
Creating Custom Fonts (Font Creator)
Creating Custom Fonts (Font Creator)
Editing the Points of a Font Character
Pattern
Editing points and
reshaping patterns
1. Click on the Tool Box.
2. Click the pattern that you want to edit.
→ The points in the pattern appear as small
white squares or circles.
3. To edit a point, click the point to select it.
→ The selected point appears as a small
black square or circle.
• To move the point, drag it to the new
location.
→ All of the selected points move in the
same direction.
• To insert a point, click the line to add a new
point.
→ A new point appears selected (as a small
black square).
• To delete the point, click Edit, then Delete,
or press the key to remove the
point.
Editing points
The lines connected to a point can be changed to
either straight lines or curves. In addition, the lines
at a point can be smoothed out or straightened.
1. Select a point in the same way that a point is
selected in “Moving points”.
2. Click Edit, then Point.
3. Click the desired command.
•Click To Straight to transform the lines at the
selected point to straight lines.
•Click To Curve to transform the lines at the
selected point to curves.
•Click To Smooth to smooth out the lines at the
selected point on a curve.
•Click To Symmetry to symmetrically transform
the lines at the selected point on a curve.
•Click To Cusp to transform the selected curve to
a pointed path.
b Memo:
You can only select one pattern at a time.
Delete
b Memo:
• To select multiple points, hold down the
key while clicking the points, or
dragging the pointer over the points.
• Hold down the key while pressing the
key or key. The selection
direction changes to the end start point.
• Hold down the key while dragging the
points. The points are moved horizontally or
vertically.
• Press an arrow key. The points move in the
direction of the arrow on the key.
Ctrl
Ctrl
Shift
232
Creating Custom Fonts (Font Creator)
Checking the Created Font Patterns
The sewing order and preview of the font character patterns and the list of created characters can be checked.
Checking and editing the
sewing order
The sewing order for the font character pattern can
be viewed and modified.
Toolbar button:
1. Click , or click Sew, then Sewing Order.
→ A Sewing Order dialog box similar to the
one shown below appears.
: Click to enlarge each pattern to fill its
frame.
■ Selecting pattern
1. Select a pattern in the Sewing Order dialog
box.
→ The selected pattern has a pink line
around it, and marching lines appear
around the corresponding pattern in the
Design Page.
■ Editing the sewing order
The sewing order can be changed by selecting the
frame containing the pattern that you want to move,
then dragging the frame to the new location. A
vertical red line appears, indicating the position
where the frame is being moved.
An alternative method for moving the frames is by
clicking the buttons at the bottom of the dialog box.
: Click to move the selected pattern to the
beginning of the sewing order.
: Click to move the selected pattern ahead
one position in the sewing order.
: Click to move the selected pattern back
one position in the sewing order.
: Click to move the selected pattern to the
end of the sewing order.
To change the sewing order, click OK.
Previewing the embroidery
pattern
A preview of the Font pattern can be viewed in the
Preview window.
Toolbar button:
1. Click , or click Display, then Preview
Window.
→ The Preview window appears.
233
Creating Custom Fonts (Font Creator)
Creating Custom Fonts (Font Creator)
Checking the list of created
characters
A list of characters included in the font file currently
being edited can be viewed.
Toolbar button:
1. Click , or click Display, then Browse
Window.
→ The Browse window appears.
■ Selecting characters
A different character can be displayed in the Design
Page by selecting a character in the Browse
window.
1. Click , or click Display, then Browse
Window.
2. Click a character, and then click Select.
→ The Browse window is closed, and the
selected character appears in the Design
Page.
234
Creating Custom Fonts (Font Creator)
Saving Font Character Patterns
Overwriting
The font character pattern being edited is overwritten
when saving any changes that have been made.
Toolbar button:
1. Click , or click File, then Save.
→ The file is saved.
→ If no file name has been specified or if the
file cannot be found, the Save As dialog
box appears.
Saving with a new name
The current file can be saved with a different file
name in order to keep the original unchanged or to
keep various versions of the same font character
pattern.
The font character patterns are saved as .pef files.
1. Click File, then Save As.
2. Select the MyFont folder in the folder where
PE-DESIGN was installed. (For example,
clicking the drive where PE-DESIGN was
installed, then Program Files, then Brother,
then PE-DESIGN 8, then MyFont) And then
type in the file name.
3. Click Save to save the font character patterns.
a Note:
If any part of the character pattern extends
off the Design Page, a message appears.
Edit the character pattern so that no part
extends off the Design Page, and then save
it again.
a Note:
• Save the font created in the
MyFont
folder. (For example, clicking the drive
where PE-DESIGN was installed, then
Program Files
, then
Brother
, then
PE-DESIGN 8
, then
MyFont
) The font will
not be usable in the Layout & Editing if it’s
stored in a different folder.
• If Layout & Editing has already started up
when a new character is saved in Font
Creator, that character will not appear in
the Font selector list in Layout & Editing. In
this case, exit Layout & Editing, and then
start it up again.
235
Creating Custom Fonts (Font Creator)
Creating Custom Fonts (Font Creator)
Changing the Settings
Changing the drawing
mode
There are two drawing modes in Font Creator.
• Fill mode
Blocks appear filled in. In this mode, the
overlapping positions of patterns can be viewed
better.
• Outline mode (Fill mode Off)
Blocks do not appear filled in. In this mode,
points can be edited more easily.
Perform the operation described below to switch
between these modes.
Toolbar button:
1. Click , or click Display, then Fill Mode.
→ The mode switches between the fill mode
and the outline mode.
Changing the display of the
background image
■ Changing the density of the
background image
The template image that remains in the work area
can be displayed or hidden, or a faded copy of the
image can be displayed.
1. Click Display, then Display Template, and
then select the desired setting.
• To display the template image, click On
(100%).
• To display a faded copy of the image, click
the desired density (75%, 50% or 25%).
• To hide the template image, click Off.
■ Scaling/Moving the background
image
1. Click Display, then Modify Template.
→ The background image is selected.
The background image can be moved or
resized in the same way that font character
patterns are edited.
c
“Editing Font Character Patterns” on
page 230.
b Memo:
• This function is not available if no template
image has been imported into the work area.
• Press the shortcut key ( ) to switch
between displaying the image (
On (100%)
)
to displaying it faded at each density (
75%
,
50%
and
25%
) to hiding the image (
Off
).
b Memo:
The background image cannot be scaled or
moved if a TrueType font is used as the
template.
F6
236
Creating Custom Fonts (Font Creator)
Changing the grid settings
The line spacing in the grid displayed in the work
area can be adjusted.
1. Click Display, then Grid Setup.
2. To display the grid, select the Show Grid
check box.
To hide the grid, clear the Show Grid check
box.
3. To input the font in a uniform thickness or
match vertical and horizontal positions, select
the Snap to Grid check box.
4. In the Grid Interval box, select the grid
spacing.
5. To display the grid as dots (intersecting points
of the grid), select the with Axes check box.
6. Click OK to apply the changes and to close the
dialog box.
b Memo:
The pointer will move by the amount set in
Grid Interval
.
The snap feature works whether or not the
grid is displayed.
237
Tips and Techniques
Tips and Techniques
Enlarging/Reducing Stitch Patterns
Imported stitch patterns can be enlarged or reduced in Layout & Editing in the following three ways.
1 Stitch patterns can be simply enlarged/reduced.
2 Stitch patterns can be enlarged/reduced while the key is held down.
3 Using the Stitch to Block function, stitch patterns can be enlarged/reduced after being converted to a
manual punching pattern.
With method 1, the stitching will become more dense or light without the number of stitches sewn changing.
In other words, greatly enlarging or reducing the pattern changes the quality of the embroidery since the thread
density is adjusted. Use this method when only slightly enlarging/reducing the stitch pattern.
With method 2, the size of the pattern is changed while maintaining the thread density and needle drop point
pattern. However, if the original thread density and needle drop point pattern in the stitch pattern are not
uniform, the thread density and needle drop point pattern may not be maintained, even by using this method.
Enlarge/reduce the pattern while checking the preview. Do not use this method when only slightly enlarging/
reducing the stitch pattern.
With method 3, the thread density is maintained while the pattern is enlarged/reduced. However, the needle
drop point pattern is not entirely maintained. Use this method when you wish to change the stitching or shape.
Do not use this method when only slightly enlarging/reducing the stitch pattern.
Sewing Direction
In order to limit shrinking, select a stitch direction perpendicular to the larger edge of the area.
Sewing Order
After creating an embroidery pattern made of several different parts (in Layout & Editing or Design Center), be
sure to check the sewing order and correct it if necessary.
With Layout & Editing, the default sewing order is the order in which the elements are drawn.
With Design Center, the default sewing order is the order in which the sewing attributes are applied.
This software allows you to create a wide variety of embroidery patterns and supports wider ranges for the
setting of the sewing attributes (thread density, sewing pitch, etc.). However, the final result also depends
on your particular embroidery machine model. We recommend that you make a trial sewing sample with
your sewing data before sewing on the final material. Remember to sew your trial sample on the same
type of fabric as your final material and to use the same needle and the same machine embroidery thread.
Ctrl
Shrinking more likely to occur Shrinking less likely to occur
238
Tips and Techniques
Sewing Wide Areas
• For best sewing results, set Under sewing to On when sewing wide regions.
c
For more details, refer to “Under sewing” on page 98.
• Changing the Sewing Direction setting prevents shrinkage of the stitching.
• When embroidering, use stabilizer material specifically for embroidering. Always use stabilizer material
when embroidering lightweight or stretch fabrics, otherwise the needle may bend or break, the stitching may
shrink, or the pattern may become misaligned.
• When satin stitching is sewn in a wide area, the stitched area may shrink after sewing, depending on the
material and the type of thread used. If this happens, switch to this alternate method: Select the fill stitch
and use stabilizer material on the reverse side of the fabric.
Jump Stitch and Jump Stitch Trimming
If the jump stitch trimming function is turned on in embroidery machines equipped with these functions, the
thread will automatically be cut at jump stitch.
Depending on the embroidery machine being used, the thread may not be cut at jump stitch shorter than a set
length.
For details on the jump stitch trimming function, refer to the Instruction Manual provided with your embroidery
machine.
Pattern
After sewing
a Note:
When using the satin stitch in a wide area, the needle may move out of position by about 10 mm with some
machines. In order to avoid this, use the above-mentioned alternate method.
Stitching StitchingJump stitch
239
Tips and Techniques
Tips and Techniques
Fonts Suitable for Embroidering
■ When sewing small fonts
For best results when embroidering designs
containing small font patterns, follow the
recommendations described below.
1. Reduce the thread tension to less than what is
used when embroidering normal designs.
2. Sew at a speed slower than what is used when
embroidering normal designs.
(For details on adjusting the thread tension
and sewing speed, refer to the Instruction
Manual provided with your embroidery
machine.)
3. Do not cut the jump stitches between the
characters.
(For details on setting the machine for thread
cutting, refer to the Instruction Manual for the
embroidery machine.)
■ When converting TrueType fonts
to embroidery patterns
For best results when converting TrueType fonts to
embroidery patterns, select a font where all lines are
as thick as possible, such as with a Gothic font.
240
Tips and Techniques
Creating Outlined Characters
(Using Text Converted to Outline Object)
Outlined characters within a shape can be created by applying the Convert to Outline Object command to a
character of a TrueType font.
1. Use a Shape tool to draw a shape.
c
For more details, refer to “Drawing
Shapes” on page 70.
2. Select a character in a TrueType font.
3. Right-click the character, and then select
Convert to Outline Object from the menu
that appeared.
c
For more details, refer to “Converting text
to outline pattern” on page 89.
4. Position the character so that it is framed by
the shape.
5. After selecting the outlined character pattern,
hold down the key and select the
background of the shape. Click on Sew then
Set hole sewing.
c
For more details, refer to “Preventing
overlapping stitching (hole sewing)” on
page 75.
6. Select the outlined pattern inside the
character, and then click the Region sew
button .
(Since the background color in this example is
black, the color selected with the Region
color button is black.)
→ The outlined character is completed.
Ctrl
241
Tips and Techniques
Tips and Techniques
Converting Characters (Japanese, Chinese,
Korean, etc) to Embroidery Patterns
Embroidery patterns can be created from various characters, such as Japanese, Chinese, Korean etc, using
TrueType fonts.
For this example, we will create an embroidery pattern from Japanese characters.
1. Select a Text tool, and then select a Japanese
TrueType font (for example, “MS Gothic”).
2. Click in the Design Page where you want to
enter the text. The Edit Text Letters dialog
box appears.
3. Display a character code table different from
the one that appeared in step 2. (Start – All
Programs – Accessories – System Tools –
Character Map)
4. Select MS Gothic from the Font list in
Character Map, and then select the
Advanced view check box. Next, select
Windows: Japanese from the Character set
list, select the desired character, and then
click Select.
(This example shows the Japanese hiragana
for the word meaning “Good Afternoon”.)
5. After selecting all of the desired characters,
click Copy to copy the characters.
6. Paste the characters into the Edit Text
Letters dialog box in Layout & Editing, and
then click OK.
b Memo:
• The following procedure describes how to
install Japanese, Chinese and Korean fonts
on the English operating system for
Windows
®
XP.
1) Click Start, select Control Panel, and
then click Date, Time, Language, and
Regional Options.
2) Click
Regional and Language Options
,
and then click the
Language
tab.
3) Select the Install files for East Asian
languages check box under
Supplemental language support, and
then click OK.
4) Complete the Windows
®
installation by
following the instructions that appear.
• If Japanese or Korean can be entered
directly from the computer keyboard, those
characters can be entered directly into the
Edit Text Letters
dialog box.
242
Tips and Techniques
243
Menus/Tools
Menus/Tools
Layout & Editing
List of tool box buttons
List of menus
■ File menu
Tool Box Purpose Reference Tool Box Purpose Reference
Sets the pointer in selection
mode.
p. 52
Sets the pointer in outline
drawing mode.
p. 73
Sets the pointer in point edit
mode.
p. 56
p. 60
p. 62
Sets the pointer in manual
punching mode.
p. 78
Sets the pointer in zoom
mode.
p. 51
Sets the pointer in measure
mode.
p. 51
Sets the pointer in text, small
text and monogram input
mode.
p. 80
Sets the pointer in split stitch
mode.
p. 64
Sets the pointer in rectangle,
circle, arc, fan shape and arc
& string drawing mode.
p. 70
Sets the pointer in stamp
input or stamp edit mode.
p. 114
Sets the pointer in various
shape drawing mode.
p. 72
Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key Reference
New Creates a new Design Page.
Ctrl + N p. 47
Open Opens a previously saved embroidery design.
Ctrl + O p. 48
Import
Imports embroidery designs from Design Library,
folder or original card.
F8 p. 48
Import from Design
Center
Imports an embroidery pattern from Design Center.
F7 p. 50
Save
Saves your embroidery design on the computer’s hard
disk as a latest version file (default).
Ctrl + S p. 138
Save As
Saves your embroidery design on the computer’s hard
disk under a new file name.
p. 138
244
Menus/Tools
■ Edit menu
Export
Exports the design shown in the Design Page as a file
of a different format (.dst, .exp, .pcs, .hus, .vip, .shv,
.jef, .sew, .csd and .xxx).
p. 138
Write to Card Writes your embroidery design to an original card.
F4
p. 17
p. 139
Property Used to enter comments in the .pes file being edited.
p. 140
Print Setup
Allows you to change the printing settings for
previewed embroidery design and image.
p. 43
p. 141
Print Preview
Allows you to preview your embroidery design and
image before printing.
p. 143
Print Prints your embroidery design and image.
Ctrl + P p. 143
Exit Exits the application.
Alt + F4
Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key Reference
Undo Undoes the last operation.
Ctrl + Z
Redo Cancels the effect of the last Undo.
Ctrl + Shift + Z
Group Turns several selected patterns into one object.
Ctrl + G
p. 55
Ungroup Cancels the grouping for grouped patterns.
Shift+ G
Cut
Removes the selected pattern(s) from the screen
while saving a copy in the Clipboard.
Ctrl + X
Copy
Saves the selected pattern(s) in the Clipboard without
removing them from the screen.
Ctrl + C
Duplicate Makes a copy of the selected pattern(s).
Ctrl + D
Paste Pastes the contents of the Clipboard on the screen.
Ctrl + V
Delete
Removes the selected pattern(s) from the screen
without saving them in the Clipboard.
Delete p. 123
Point
To
Straight
Straightens the two rounded lines that meet at a point
on a curve.
p. 58
To Curve
Rounds off the two straight lines that meet at a corner
point.
p. 58
To
Smooth
Smoothes out the path at a point.
p. 59
To
Symmetry
Adjusts the control handles of a point symmetrically.
p. 59
To Cusp Transforms to a pointed path.
p. 59
Delete Removes the selected point(s).
p. 58
Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key Reference
245
Menus/Tools
Menus/Tools
■ Image menu
Mirror
Horizontal
Flips the selected pattern(s) up/down.
Ctrl + H
p. 54
Vertical Flips the selected pattern(s) left/right.
Ctrl + J
Rotate
Allows you to manually rotate the selected pattern(s)
by an arbitrary angle.
Ctrl + Y p. 54
Numerical
Setting
Size Resizes the selected pattern numerically.
p. 53
Rotate Rotates the selected pattern numerically.
p. 55
Center
Moves the selected pattern to the center of the Design
Page.
Ctrl + M p. 52
Align
Left Aligns the selected patterns on their left sides.
p. 53
Center Aligns the selected patterns on their left/right centers.
Right Aligns the selected patterns on their right sides.
Top Aligns the selected patterns on their top edges.
Middle
Aligns the selected patterns on their top/bottom
centers.
Bottom Aligns the selected patterns on their bottom edges.
Select All Selects all of the patterns.
Ctrl + A p. 52
Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key Reference
Input
from File Imports image data from an existing file.
p. 120
from
TWAIN
device
Operates a TWAIN standardized scanner or other
device to import an image.
p. 120
from
Portrait
Combines images of facial features that are provided
with the application to create an original portrait.
p. 121
from
Clipboard
Imports image data from the Clipboard.
p. 122
Output
to File Saves the image data as a file.
p. 124
to
Clipboard
Copies the image data onto the Clipboard.
p. 124
Select TWAIN Device
Selects which TWAIN device installed in the computer
to use.
p. 120
Modify
Adjusts the size, direction and position of the image
data.
p. 123
Rotate
90 Degrees
Clockwise
Rotates the image data to clockwise in 90 degree.
p. 123
90 Degrees
Counter-
clockwise
Rotates the image data to counterclockwise in 90
degree.
p. 123
Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key Reference
246
Menus/Tools
■ Text menu
■ Sew menu
Image to Stitch
Wizard
Gives step-by-step instruction for creating embroidery
pattern from image data.
p. 125
Display
Image
On
(100%)
Displays the template image (density: 100%).
F6
p. 123
75%
Displays a faded copy of the template image (density:
75%).
F6
50%
Displays a faded copy of the template image (density:
50%).
F6
25%
Displays a faded copy of the template image (density:
25%).
F6
Off Hides the template image.
F6
Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key Reference
Edit Letters Allows you to edit entered text.
Ctrl + L p. 91
Text Attribute Setting Sets the text attributes of the text pattern.
Ctrl + K p. 83
Fit Text to Path
Setting
Fits a line of text along a path.
Ctrl + T p. 87
Release Text from
Path
Releases the text from the path.
Ctrl + Q p. 88
TrueType Font
Attribute Setting
Sets the attributes, such as the style, for TrueType
fonts that are converted to embroidery pattern.
p. 89
Convert to Outline
Object
Creates outline data from text pattern converted from
a TrueType font.
p. 89
Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key Reference
Sewing Attribute
Setting
Sets the sewing attributes of the regions and the
outlines of a pattern.
Ctrl + W p. 96
Sewing Order/Lock
Allows you to check and change the sewing order of
pattern colors and individual patterns.
In addition, locks the embroidery pattern.
F10 p. 118
Set hole sewing
Sets a pair of patterns for hole sewing (to avoid
sewing twice at the same place when a pattern
encloses another one).
p. 75
Cancel hole sewing Cancels hole sewing.
p. 75
Remove Overlaps
Removes the overlapping area of the bottom
embroidery pattern when multiple embroidery
patterns are overlapped.
p. 75
Merge
Merges together multiple overlapped embroidery
patterns.
p. 76
Divide Stitches by
Color
Divides the stitch data according to the various colors.
p. 64
Stitch to Block
Converts stitch patterns into blocks (manual punching
data), allowing you to set sewing attributes and to
keep the stitching quality when scaling.
p. 63
Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key Reference
247
Menus/Tools
Menus/Tools
■ Display menu
Convert to Stitches Converts a shape pattern to a stitch pattern.
p. 62
Applique Wizard
Provides step-by-step instructions for easily creating
appliqués.
p. 137
Select Sewing Area Sets the sewing area.
p. 140
Optimize hoop
change
Optimizes the sewing order of patterns in a Design
Page for multi-position embroidery frames (100 × 172
mm or 130 × 300 mm).
p. 183
Optimize Entry/
Exit points
Optimizes the positions of the entry points and the exit
points for the embroidery pattern.
p. 60
Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key Reference
Grid Setup Controls the display and characteristics of the grid.
p. 69
Preview
Specifies whether the patterns appear as stitches or
in the normal view.
F9 p. 65
Realistic Preview
Displays a realistic image of how either selected patterns
or all patterns will look after being embroidered.
Shift + F9 p. 65
Realistic Preview
Attribute Setting
Sets the preview attributes for the Realistic Preview
function.
p. 65
Refresh Window Updates the screen.
Ctrl + R
Stitch Simulator Displays a simulation of the machine stitching.
p. 66
Reference Window Hides/displays the Reference Window.
F11 p. 66
Ruler Hides/displays the rulers.
p. 69
Toolbar Hides/displays the Toolbar.
p. 47
Status Bar Hides/displays the status bar.
Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key Reference
248
Menus/Tools
■ Option menu
■ Help menu
Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key Reference
Design Center
Starts up Design Center and displays its window up
front.
F5
p. 145
p. 153
Programmable Stitch
Creator
Starts up Programmable Stitch Creator and displays
its window up front.
p. 199
p. 205
Design Database
Starts up Design Database and displays its window
up front.
F12 p. 187
Font Creator
Starts up Font Creater and displays its window up
front.
p. 217
p. 225
Design Property
Displays a dialog box containing sewing information
for the selected pattern(s).
p. 137
Design Page Property
Allows you to change the size of the Design Page, and
the color of the Design Page and the background.
p. 68
Edit User Thread
Chart
Allows original thread charts to be created and edited.
p. 110
Select
System
Unit
mm Allows you to change the system units to millimeters.
p. 69
inch Allows you to change the system units to inches.
Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key Reference
Instruction Manual Starts up the Instruction Manual.
F1 p. 13
Check for Updates Checks for the updated version on the Web.
p. 14
Customer Support Opens the Customer Support Page on our Web site.
p. 14
Online Registration Opens the online registration page from our Web site.
p. 14
About
Layout & Editing
Gives information about the version of this application.
249
Menus/Tools
Menus/Tools
Design Center
List of tool box buttons
■ Line Image Stage
■ Figure Handle Stage
Tool Box Purpose Reference Tool Box Purpose Reference
The five first buttons are used
as pens and erasers (when
the right mouse button is held
down) of different
thicknesses.
p. 147
This button is used as eraser.
p. 147
Sets the pointer in zoom-in
mode.
Maximizes the selected
Design Page to fit in the
window.
Sets the pointer in zoom-out
mode.
Tool Box Purpose Reference Tool Box Purpose Reference
Sets the pointer in selection
mode.
p. 148
Sets the pointer in zoom-in
mode.
Sets the pointer in point edit
mode.
p. 149
Maximizes the selected
Design Page to fit in the
window.
Sets the pointer in line
drawing mode.
p. 148
Sets the pointer in zoom-out
mode.
Fills the display with the
selected objects.
250
Menus/Tools
■ Sew Setting Stage
List of menus
■ File menu
Tool Box Purpose Reference Tool Box Purpose Reference
Sets the pointer in region
sewing mode.
p. 163
Sets the pointer in zoom-in
mode.
Sets the pointer in line (all)
sewing mode.
p. 164
Maximizes the selected
Design Page to fit in the
window.
Sets the pointer in line (part)
sewing mode.
Sets the pointer in zoom-out
mode.
Sets the pointer in hole
sewing mode.
p. 168
Sets the pointer in stamp
input mode.
p. 168
Sets the pointer in stamp edit
mode.
Menu
Toolbar
Purpose Shortcut key Reference
New Line Image
Creates a new Design Page and switches to the Line
Image Stage.
Ctrl + N p. 157
New Figure Data
Creates a new Design Page and switches to the
Figure Handle Stage.
p. 160
Wizard
Gives a step-by-step guide for creating pattern,
according the type of data you want to create.
F3 p. 154
Open Opens a previously saved file (.pem, .pel) or image file.
Ctrl + O p. 155
Select TWAIN Device
Selects which TWAIN device installed in the computer
to use.
p. 155
Input from TWAIN
device
Operates a TWAIN standardized scanner or other
device to import an image.
Input from Clipboard
Opens a new Design Page in the Original Image Stage,
and imports the image data from the Clipboard.
Output to Clipboard
Copies the Original Image Stage image data to the
Clipboard.
Import Figure
Adds a .pem file to your Design Page (available only
in the Figure Handle stage).
F8
Save
Saves your Design Page on the disk as latest version
file (default).
Ctrl + S p. 169
Save As Saves the current pattern under a new file name.
p. 169
Exit Exits the application.
Alt + F4
251
Menus/Tools
Menus/Tools
■ Edit menu
■ Sew menu
Menu
Toolbar
Purpose Shortcut key Reference
Undo Undoes the last operation.
Ctrl + Z
Redo Cancels the effect of the last Undo.
Ctrl + Shift + Z
Cut
Removes the selected pattern from the screen while
saving a copy in the Clipboard.
Ctrl + X
Copy
Saves the selected pattern in the Clipboard without
removing them from the screen.
Ctrl + C
Duplicate Makes a copy of the selected pattern.
Ctrl + D
Paste Pastes the contents of the Clipboard on the screen.
Ctrl + V
Delete
Removes the selected pattern from the screen without
saving them in the Clipboard.
Delete
Split Splits the line at a point into two.
p. 149
Mirror
Horizontal
Flips the selected pattern up/down.
Ctrl + H
p. 160
Vertical Flips the selected pattern left/right.
Ctrl + J
Rotate Allows you to change the direction of the pattern.
Ctrl + Y p. 160
Numerical
Setting
Size Resizes the selected pattern numerically.
p. 160
Rotate Rotates the selected pattern numerically.
p. 160
Select All Selects all of the pattern.
Ctrl + A
Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key Reference
Sewing Attribute
Setting
Sets the sewing attributes for outlines and regions.
Ctrl + W p. 165
Sewing Order
Allows you to check and modify the sewing order of
the different colors of a pattern as well as the sewing
order of each color individually.
F10 p. 168
252
Menus/Tools
■ Display menu
■ Option menu
Menu
Tool bar
Purpose Shortcut key Reference
Grid Setup
Allows you to set up the grid, to switch it on or off, and
to display it with or without the horizontal and vertical
lines.
p. 161
Modify Template
Adjusts the size and position of the background
image.
p. 159
Display
Template
On Displays the template image.
F6
p. 159
Faded Displays a faded copy of the template image.
F6
Off Hides the template image.
F6
Preview
Specifies whether the patterns appear as stitches or
in the normal view.
F9
Realistic Preview
Displays a realistic image of how the patterns will look
after being embroidered.
Shift + F9
Realistic Preview
Attribute Setting
Sets the preview attributes for Realistic Preview.
Refresh Window Updates the screen.
Ctrl + R
Stitch Simulator Displays a simulation of the machine stitching.
p. 169
Reference Window Hides/displays the Reference Window.
F11 p. 161
Toolbar Hides/displays the Toolbar.
p. 153
Status Bar Hides/displays the status bar.
Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key Reference
Layout & Editing
Starts up Layout & Editing and displays its window up
front.
F5 p. 47
Programmable Stitch
Creator
Starts up Programmable Stitch Creator and displays
its window up front.
p. 199
p. 205
Design Page Property
Allows you to change the size of the Design Page and
the color of the Design Page and the background.
p. 159
Select
System
Unit
mm Allows you to change the system units to millimeters.
p. 161
inch Allows you to change the system units to inches.
253
Menus/Tools
Menus/Tools
■ Stage menu
■ Help menu
Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key Reference
To Original Image Moves back to the Original Image Stage.
p. 146
To Line Image Moves to the Line Image Stage.
p. 156
To Figure Handle Moves to the Figure Handle Stage.
p. 158
To Sew Setting
Moves from the Figure Handle Stage to the Sew
Setting Stage.
p. 163
To Layout & Editing
Exports the embroidery pattern from the Sew Setting
Stage to Layout & Editing.
p. 152
Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key Reference
Instruction Manual Starts up the Instruction Manual.
F1 p. 13
Customer Support Opens the Customer Support Page on our Web site.
p. 14
About Design Center Gives information about the version of this application.
254
Menus/Tools
Design Database
List of menus
■ File menu
■ Edit menu
Menu
Toolbar
Purpose Shortcut key Reference
Open in Layout &
Editing
Opens the embroidery design file with Layout &
Editing.
p. 189
Import into Layout &
Editing
Imports the embroidery design file into Layout &
Editing.
p. 189
Create New Folder
Creates a new folder in the selected folder.
p. 190
Convert Format
Converts the embroidery design file to one of a
different format.
p. 193
Delete Deletes the selected embroidery design file.
Delete p. 191
Search
Allows the desired embroidery design file to be
searched for.
Ctrl + F p. 192
Print Setup
Allows you to change the printing settings for catalogs
of embroidery design files.
p. 196
Print Preview
Allows you to preview the catalog of embroidery
design files before printing.
Print Prints the catalog of embroidery design files.
Ctrl + P p. 196
Create HTML
Outputs the catalog of embroidery design files as an
HTML file.
p. 196
Create CSV
Outputs the catalog of embroidery design files sewing
information as a CSV file.
p. 197
Exit Exits the application.
Alt + F4
Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key Reference
Cut
Removes the selected embroidery design file(s) from
the folder while saving a copy in the Clipboard.
Ctrl + X
p. 190
Copy
Saves the selected embroidery design file(s) in the
Clipboard without removing them from the folder.
Ctrl + C
Paste
Pastes the embroidery design file(s) from the
Clipboard into the selected folder.
Ctrl + V
Select All Selects all files displayed in the contents pane.
Ctrl + A
255
Menus/Tools
Menus/Tools
■ Display menu
■ Option menu
■ Help menu
Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key Reference
Large Thumbnails
Lists the embroidery design file(s) in the contents
pane as large thumbnails.
p. 191
Small Thumbnails
Lists the embroidery design file(s) in the contents
pane as small thumbnails.
Details
Lists the embroidery design file(s) in the contents
pane by their sewing information.
Preview
Displays a preview of the selected embroidery design
file.
p. 188
Property
Displays the sewing information for the selected
embroidery design file.
p. 188
Refresh
Refreshes the display of embroidery design file(s) in
the contents pane.
Ctrl + R
Toolbar Hides/displays the Toolbar.
p. 187
Status Bar Hides/displays the status bar.
Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key Reference
Select
System
Unit
mm Allows you to change the system units to millimeters.
p. 69
inch Allows you to change the system units to inches.
Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key Reference
Instruction Manual Starts up the Instruction Manual.
F1 p. 13
Customer support Opens the Customer Support Page on our Web site.
p. 14
About Design
Database
Gives information about the version of this application.
256
Menus/Tools
Programmable Stitch Creator
List of tool box buttons
List of menus
■ File menu
■ Mode menu
Tool Box Purpose Reference Tool Box Purpose Reference
Sets the pointer in selection
mode.
p. 209
p. 213
Sets the pointer in region
(reset) mode.
p. 211
Sets the pointer in point edit
mode.
p. 203
p. 209
p. 212
Sets the pointer in region
(engrave) mode.
p. 201
p. 211
Sets the pointer in line
drawing mode.
p. 200
p. 208
Sets the pointer in region
(emboss) mode.
Menu
Toolbar
Purpose Shortcut key Reference
New Creates a new work area.
Ctrl + N p. 207
Open Opens a previously saved stitch pattern file.
Ctrl + O p. 206
Template Open
Opens a background image file that can be used as a
guide to draw a new pattern for a programmable fill or
motif stitch.
p. 206
Save Saves your work area on the disk.
Ctrl + S p. 214
Save As
Saves the current stitch pattern under a new file
name.
p. 214
Exit Exits the application.
Alt + F4
Menu
Toolbar
Purpose Shortcut key Reference
Fill/Stamp
Enters Fill/Stamp mode for creating stitch patterns for
programmable fill stitches and stamps.
p. 207
Motif
Enters Motif mode for creating stitch patterns for motif
stitches.
257
Menus/Tools
Menus/Tools
■ Edit menu
Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key Reference
Undo Undoes the last operation.
Ctrl + Z
Redo Cancels the effect of the last Undo.
Ctrl + Shift + Z
Cut
Removes the selected line(s) from the screen while
saving a copy in the Clipboard.
Ctrl + X
Copy
Saves the selected line(s) in the Clipboard without
removing them from the screen.
Ctrl + C
Duplicate Adds a copy of the selected line(s) to the work area.
Ctrl + D
Paste Pastes the lines of the Clipboard on the screen.
Ctrl + V
Delete
Removes the selected line(s) from the screen without
saving them in the Clipboard.
Delete
Mirror
Horizontal
Flips the selected line(s) up/down.
Ctrl + H
p. 213
Vertical Flips the selected line(s) left/right.
Ctrl + J
Rotate
Allows you to manually rotate the selected line(s) by
an arbitrary angle.
Ctrl + Y
Select All Selects all of the lines.
Ctrl + A
258
Menus/Tools
■ Display menu
■ Help menu
Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key Reference
Grid
Wide Displays the grid interval of 1/8 of a work area’s edge.
p. 215
Medium
Displays the grid interval of 1/16 of a work area’s
edge.
Narrow
Displays the grid interval of 1/32 of a work area’s
edge.
None Hides the grid.
Template
On
(100%)
Displays the template image (density: 100%).
F6
p. 215
75%
Displays a faded copy of the template image
(density: 75%).
F6
50%
Displays a faded copy of the template image
(density: 50%).
F6
25%
Displays a faded copy of the template image
(density: 25%).
F6
Off Hides the template image.
F6
Preview
Hides/displays the repeating image display of the
pattern being created.
p. 208
Toolbar Hides/displays the Toolbar.
p. 199
Status Bar Hides/displays the status bar.
Menu
Toolbar
Purpose Shortcut key Reference
Instruction Manual Starts up the Instruction Manual.
F1 p. 13
Customer support Opens the Customer Support Page on our Web site.
p. 14
About Programmable
Stitch Creator
Gives information about the version of this application.
259
Menus/Tools
Menus/Tools
Font Creator
List of tool box buttons
List of menus
■ File menu
Tool Box Purpose Reference Tool Box Purpose Reference
Sets the pointer in selection
mode.
p. 230
Sets the pointer in zoom
mode.
Sets the pointer in point edit
mode.
p. 231
Sets the pointer in manual
punching mode.
p. 229
Menu
Toolbar
Purpose Shortcut key Reference
New Creates a new work area.
Ctrl + N p. 225
Open Opens a previously saved font file.
Ctrl + O p. 225
Template
Open
from File
Opens a background image file that can be used as a guide
to draw a Font Pattern.
p. 227
Select
TrueType
Font
Opens a TrueType font to be used as a template or for
converting.
p. 227
Save Saves created font pattern on the disk.
Ctrl + S p. 234
Save As Saves the current font pattern under a new file name.
p. 234
Add/Remove Letters
Adds/deletes registered characters.
p. 226
Exit Exits the application.
Alt + F4
260
Menus/Tools
■ Edit menu
Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key Reference
Undo Undoes the last operation.
Ctrl + Z
Redo Cancels the effect of the last Undo.
Ctrl + Shift + Z
Cut
Removes the selected pattern(s) from the screen
while saving a copy in the Clipboard.
Ctrl + X
Copy
Saves the selected pattern(s) in the Clipboard without
removing them from the screen.
Ctrl + C
Duplicate
Adds a copy of the selected pattern(s) to the work
area.
Ctrl + D
Paste Pastes the contents of the Clipboard on the screen.
Ctrl + V
Delete
Removes the selected pattern(s) from the screen
without saving them in the Clipboard.
Delete
Point
To
Straight
Straightens the two rounded lines that meet at a point
on a curve.
p. 231
To Curve
Rounds off the two straight lines that meet at a corner
point.
To
Smooth
Smoothes out the path at a point.
To
Symmetry
Adjusts the control handles of a point symmetrically.
To Cusp Transforms to a pointed path.
Delete Removes the selected point(s).
Mirror
Horizontal
Flips the selected pattern(s) up/down.
Ctrl + H
p. 230
Vertical Flips the selected pattern(s) left/right.
Ctrl + J
Rotate
Allows you to manually rotate the selected pattern(s)
by an arbitrary angle.
Ctrl + Y p. 230
Align
Left Aligns the selected patterns on their left sides.
Center Aligns the selected patterns on their left/right centers.
Right Aligns the selected patterns on their right sides.
Top Aligns the selected patterns on their top edges.
Middle
Aligns the selected patterns on their top/bottom
centers.
Bottom Aligns the selected patterns on their bottom edges.
Select All Selects all of the patterns.
Ctrl + A
261
Menus/Tools
Menus/Tools
■ Sew menu
■ Display menu
■ Help menu
Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key Reference
Sewing Order
Allows you to check and change the sewing order of
individual patterns.
F10 p. 232
Convert TrueType
Font to Data
Converts a template of a TrueType font to a custom
font character patterns.
p. 229
Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key Reference
Grid Setup
Allows you to set up the grid, to switch it on or off, and
to display it with or without the horizontal and vertical
lines.
p. 236
Fill Mode
Switches the display mode between fill mode (blocks
appear filled in) and outline mode (blocks do not
appear filled in).
F9 p. 235
Preview Window Hides/displays the Preview Window.
F11 p. 232
Browse Window Displays the Browse Window.
p. 233
Modify Template
Adjusts the size and position of the background
image.
p. 235
Display
Template
On
(100%)
Displays the template image (density: 100%).
F6
p. 235
75%
Displays a faded copy of the template image
(density: 75%).
F6
50%
Displays a faded copy of the template image
(density: 50%).
F6
25%
Displays a faded copy of the template image
(density: 25%).
F6
Off Hides the template image.
F6
Toolbar Hides/displays the Toolbar.
p. 217
Status Bar Hides/displays the status bar.
Menu Toolbar Purpose Shortcut key Reference
Instruction Manual Starts up the Instruction Manual.
F1 p. 13
Customer Support Opens the Customer Support Page on our Web site.
p. 14
About Font Creator Gives information about the version of this application.
262
Troubleshooting
If a problem occurs, click Help, then Customer Support in the menu to visit the following Web site, where you
can find causes and solutions to various problems and answers to frequently asked questions.
If you have a problem, check the following solutions. If the solutions suggested do not correct the problem,
contact your authorized dealer or Brother Customer Service.
Problem Estimated Cause Solution Page
The software is not installed
correctly.
An operation not
described in the
installation procedure was
performed. (For example,
Cancel was clicked or the
CD-ROM was removed
before the procedure was
completed.)
Follow the instructions and correctly
perform the procedure.
The installer does not
automatically start up.
Refer to memo: “If the installer does
not automatically start up”.
The message “No card writer
module is connected. Please
connect card writer module.”
appeared.
The driver for the USB
card writer module is not
installed correctly.
When the USB connector is correctly
plugged into the USB port, the installer
for the driver of the USB card writer
module starts up.
If the operation
described at the
left does not
correct the
problem, go to
the Web site
mentioned under
“Support/
Service”.
(Refer to page 14.)
When trying to upgrade from
an older version, the message
“Cannot connect to the
Internet.” or “The server could
not be connected to. Wait a
while, and then try connecting
again.” appeared and the USB
card writer module could not
be upgraded.
The computer with the
USB card writer module
connected to its USB
port could not establish a
connection to the
Internet.
To upgrade the USB card writer
module, the computer with the card
writer module connected to its USB
port must connect to the Internet. If
firewall software is being used, it must
be temporarily disabled during the
upgrade. If a connection to the Internet
cannot be established, contact your
authorized dealer.
The USB card writer module
does not operate correctly.
Not enough power is
being supplied.
Connect the USB card writer module
to a USB port on the computer or to a
self-powered USB hub that can supply
enough power to the card writer
module.
263
Index
A
aligning
embroidery patterns ............................................53
Appliqué ......................................................95, 137, 174
Arc ...............................................................................71
attaching stabilizer ....................................................178
Auto Punch function ..................................................126
B
Back stitch .................................................................135
Beginner mode ....................................................96, 166
blending ....................................................................115
blocks from stitch data ................................................63
C
canceling
hole sewing .........................................................75
text arrangement .................................................88
Card writer ..................................................................17
catalogs
CSV files ...........................................................197
HTML files .........................................................196
printing ..............................................................196
center point .................................................................61
centering .....................................................................52
Change Color ....................................................131, 134
changing
thread color order ..............................................113
Changing the character spacing ................................. 86
Character Spacing ................................................84, 86
Check for Updates ......................................................14
checking
sewing order .....................................................117
stitching ...............................................................66
Circle ...........................................................................71
Color button ........................................................95, 165
Color Option .............................................................. 131
combining
pattern colors ....................................................118
concentric circle stitch ...........................................7, 107
center point .........................................................61
Convert to Stitch .........................................................62
converting
embroidery pattern formats ............................... 193
copying
images ..............................................................124
creating
new folders ........................................................190
new thread color chart ......................................110
cross stitch ............................................................7, 107
Cross Stitch function .................................................134
Custom Font ...............................................................82
Customer Support .......................................................14
D
deleting
stitch points .........................................................63
thread color charts ............................................111
thread colors from charts ..................................112
Design Center ...................................................145, 249
Design Database ..............................................187, 254
Design Page Property .................................68, 159, 182
Design Page size ................................................68, 159
multi-position hoops ..........................................182
Design Property ........................................................137
Display
Small Thumbnails .............................................191
displaying
background images ..........................................215
embroidery patterns ..........................................191
images ......................................................123, 159
Divide Stitches by Color ..............................................64
drawing
broken lines ......................................................161
portrait ...............................................................121
E
E/V stitch ...............................................................6, 100
editing
grouped objects ..................................................55
points ..........................................................56, 209
sewing order .....................................................118
thread color charts ............................................111
thread colors .....................................................113
embossing .........................................................205, 211
embroidering .............................................................180
embroidery patterns
adding comments .............................................140
aligning ...............................................................53
centering .............................................................52
converting formats ............................................193
displaying ..........................................................191
exporting ...........................................................138
from images ................................................19, 125
grouping ..............................................................55
importing ...........................................................189
information ................................................137, 188
multi-position hoops ..........................................183
printing ......................................................186
opening .............................................................189
organizing .........................................................190
engraving ..........................................................205, 211
entry/exit points
moving ................................................................60
optimizing ............................................................60
eraser ........................................................................147
Expert mode ........................................................96, 166
exporting embroidery patterns ..................................138
264
Index
F
Fan .............................................................................. 71
Figure Handle stage
Tool Box buttons ............................................... 249
File
New Line Image ................................................ 157
Open in Layout & Editing .................................. 189
Search .............................................................. 192
File Property ............................................................. 188
fill stitch ................................................................. 6, 103
Fill/Stamp mode ........................................................ 207
folders ....................................................................... 190
Font Creator ...................................................... 217, 259
Font selector ............................................................... 81
G
geometric attributes .................................................... 93
arcs ..................................................................... 70
circles ................................................................. 70
closed paths ....................................................... 74
open paths .......................................................... 74
Gradation .......................................................... 115, 167
grid .............................................................. 69, 161, 215
grouping embroidery patterns ..................................... 55
H
Hint view ............................................................. 97, 166
hole sewing ......................................................... 75, 168
hoop changes ........................................................... 184
hooping ..................................................................... 179
Horizontal Alignment ................................................... 88
I
Image to Stitch Wizard .............................................. 125
Image Tune ............................................................... 128
Image Type ............................................................... 131
images
converting to embroidery patterns .............. 19, 125
moving .............................................................. 123
outputting .......................................................... 124
resizing ............................................................. 123
saving ............................................................... 124
scaling .............................................................. 123
importing
.pem files .......................................................... 154
background images .......................................... 206
Clipboard images ...................................... 122, 155
embroidery patterns .................................... 48, 189
from Design Center ............................................ 50
from embroidery cards ...................................... 195
images ...................................................... 120, 155
TWAIN images ................................................. 120
Input
from Clipboard .................................................. 122
from File ............................................................ 120
from Portrait ...................................................... 121
from TWAIN device .......................................... 120
inserting
stitch points ......................................................... 63
Installation Guide ........................................................ 13
Instruction Manual ...................................................... 13
J
Jump Stitch ......................................................... 63, 238
K
Kerning ....................................................................... 83
L
Large Thumbnails ..................................................... 191
Layout & Editing ............................................ 16, 47, 243
Line color button ......................................................... 94
Line Image stage
Tool Box buttons ............................................... 249
Line Interval .............................................................. 133
Line sew button ........................................................... 94
Line sew type selector ................................................ 94
line sewing attributes .................................................. 98
Line Spacing ............................................................... 84
Lock .......................................................................... 119
M
Manual punch ........................................................... 108
manual punching ........................................................ 77
Manual Select ........................................................... 131
marking embroidering position .................................. 178
Max. Density ............................................................. 133
Max. Number of Colors ..................................... 131, 135
Measure ................................................................ 51, 69
measurement units ............................................. 69, 161
Merge .......................................................................... 76
Mirror
Horizontal ................................................... 54, 160
Vertical ........................................................ 54, 160
Modify ......................................................... 21, 123, 159
monograms ................................................................. 90
Motif mode ................................................................ 207
motif stitch ....................................................... 6, 99, 106
moving
center points ....................................................... 61
embroidery patterns to center ............................. 52
entry/exit points .................................................. 60
images ........................................................ 21, 123
stitch points ......................................................... 63
multi-position hoops .................................................. 182
N
New ..................................................................... 47, 207
New Figure Data ....................................................... 160
NOT DEFINED ........................................................... 95
265
Index
O
Online Registration .....................................................14
opening
.pem files ...........................................................154
.pes file ................................................................48
background images ...........................................206
Clipboard images ......................................122, 155
embroidery patterns ....................................48, 189
images ......................................................120, 155
Layout & Editing file ............................................48
new Design Page ................................................ 47
new figure handle images .........................154, 160
new line images ........................................154, 157
new stitch pattern ..............................................207
stitch patterns ....................................................206
TWAIN images .................................................. 120
optimizing
entry/exit points ...................................................60
hoop changes ...................................................184
Option
Design Property ................................................184
Edit User Thread Chart .....................................110
organizing embroidery patterns ................................190
outlines
converted from text .............................................89
Output
to Clipboard ....................................................... 124
to File ................................................................124
Oval .............................................................................71
P
pattern information ............................................137, 188
adding comments ..............................................140
multi-position hoops ..........................................184
patterns
selecting ............................................................117
Pencil ..........................................................................74
Photo Stitch 1
Color ...........................................................24, 127
Mono .................................................................130
Sepia .................................................................129
Photo Stitch 2
Color .................................................................132
Mono .................................................................133
piping stitch ...........................................................7, 105
points
editing .........................................................56, 209
portraits .....................................................................121
Preview window ........................................................208
previewing ...........................................................65, 188
stitch patterns ....................................................208
printing
catalogs .............................................................196
embroidery patterns ..........................................143
multi-position hoops ..................................186
preview ..............................................................143
settings ..............................................................141
Programmable fill stitch ............................................. 103
Programmable Stitch Creator ...................199, 206, 256
Property .................................................................... 140
Pull Compensation ....................................................102
R
radial stitch ............................................................7, 107
center point .........................................................61
realistic previewing ................................................22, 65
settings ...............................................................65
Rectangle ....................................................................70
Redo .................................................244, 251, 257, 260
Reference Window ............................................247, 252
Refresh .....................................................................255
Refresh Window ................................................247, 252
Region color button ...................................................165
Region sew button ......................................................94
Region sew type selector ..........................................165
region sewing attributes ............................................163
Remove overlaps ........................................................75
resizing
images ........................................................21, 123
Rotate ...........................................................54, 55, 160
Rotate angle ................................................................83
Ruler ...........................................................................69
Run Pitch ..................................................................131
running stitch ...........................................................6, 98
S
satin stitch .............................................................6, 101
saving
different formats ................................................138
embroidery patterns ..................................138, 169
images ..............................................................124
on card ..............................................................139
stitch patterns ...................................................214
scaling
images ........................................................21, 123
Scaling patterns ..................................53, 209, 213, 230
searching ..................................................................192
Select from Candidates .............................................131
selecting
all embroidery patterns .......................................52
colors ........................................................131, 134
patterns .......................................................52, 117
sewing area ......................................................140
Sew
Cancel hole sewing .............................................75
Sew Page Color ........................................................131
Sew Setting stage
Tool Box buttons ...............................................250
Sew type selector ................................................96, 165
sewing attributes .........................................................93
regions ..............................................................163
setting .........................................................96, 165
Sewing Attributes bar ................................................164
sewing direction
programmable fill stitch .....................................109
Sewing Option ...........................................................131
sewing order ..................................................... 117, 168
editing ...............................................................118
Small Text .............................................................80, 82
special colors ..............................................................95
spiral stitch ............................................................7, 107
Split Stitch data ...........................................................64
stabilizer ....................................................................178
Stage
To Figure Handle ..............................................158
To Line Image ...................................................156
To Sew Setting .................................................163
266
Index
stamp attributes ........................................................ 114
stamps ...................................................................... 168
Step Pitch ......................................................... 103, 104
Stippling stitch ....................................................... 7, 108
stitch patterns
previewing ........................................................ 208
saving ............................................................... 214
stitch points
deleting ............................................................... 63
inserting .............................................................. 63
moving ................................................................ 63
stitch simulator ............................................................ 66
Stitch to Block ............................................................. 63
String .......................................................................... 71
T
Template ..................................... 19, 120, 178, 206, 226
Template Open ......................................................... 206
Text
Convert to Outline Object ................................... 89
Edit Letters ......................................................... 83
Fit Text to Path Setting ....................................... 87
Release Text from Path ...................................... 88
Text Attribute Setting .......................................... 83
TrueType Font Attribute Setting ......................... 89
text attributes .................................................. 81, 83, 93
Text menu ................................................................. 246
Text Orientation .......................................................... 88
Text Size selector ....................................................... 83
the other side .............................................................. 88
Thread Chart ............................................. 131, 134, 135
thread colors
adding to charts ................................................ 111
APPLIQUE .......................................................... 96
creating new colors ........................................... 112
deleting charts .................................................. 111
deleting from charts .......................................... 112
editing ............................................................... 113
editing charts .................................................... 111
new charts ........................................................ 110
NOT DEFINED ................................................... 95
order ................................................................. 113
user list ............................................................. 110
Thread Colors Used .................................................. 134
To Curve ..................................................................... 58
transferring to card .................................................... 139
Triple stitch ................................................................. 98
TrueType Font ............................................................ 82
U
Under sewing ...................................................... 98, 101
Undo ................................................. 244, 251, 257, 260
units of measure ................................................. 69, 161
user thread color list ................................................. 110
V
Vertical Alignment ....................................................... 88
Vertical Offset ............................................................. 83
W
Wizard ....................................................................... 154
Write to Card ............................................................. 139
Z
zigzag stitch ............................................................ 6, 98
Zoom ........................................................................... 51
English
3 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Brother PeDesign8 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Brother PeDesign8 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 23,58 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Brother PeDesign8

Brother PeDesign8 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 268 pagina's

Brother PeDesign8 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 283 pagina's

Brother PeDesign8 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Français - 285 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info